Garmin G1000 - Diamond DA40/DA40F Quick Reference Guide

Diamond

DA40/40F

Copyright © 2006 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 396.10 or later for the Diamond DA40 or DA40F. Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.

Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.

Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282

Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.

Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax: 503/364.2138

Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Unit 5, The Quadrangle, Abbey Park Industrial Estate, Romsey, Hampshire S051 9DL, U.K

Tel: 44/0870.8501241 Fax: 44/0870.8501251

Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan

Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099

Website Address: www.garmin.com

Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.

Garmin

®

and G1000

®

are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.

Bendix/King

®

and Honeywell

®

are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; Becker

®

is a registered trademark of Becker

Flugfunkwerk GmbH; NavData

®

is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; and XM

®

is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio,

Inc..

June 2006

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40/40F

Printed in the U.S.A.

190-00592-01 Rev. A

LIMITED WARRANTY

LIMITED WARRANTY

This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.

THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO

STATE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER

RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.

Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.

To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit the Garmin Website at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


i

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES ii

WARNING:

Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function.

The G1000 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The

Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.

WARNING:

The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.

WARNING:

The Garmin G1000, as installed in Diamond DA40/40F aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.

WARNING:

The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data

Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.

WARNING:

The Jeppesen database used in the G1000 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that its information remains current. Updates are released every 28 days. A database information packet is included in the G1000 package. Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk.

WARNING:

The basemap (land and water data) must not be used for navigation, but rather only for nonnavigational situational awareness. Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation sources.

WARNING:

Traffic information shown on the G1000 Multi Function Display is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic. Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic.

WARNING:

XM Weather should not be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information provided by the GDL 69 is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.

WARNING:

NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent delays in data transmission and the relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather data should not be used for short-range weather avoidance.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING:

For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.

CAUTION:

The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic

NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.

CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000

Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Diamond DA40/40F Aircraft Flight Manual. Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.

CAUTION:

The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Airman’s Information

Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense radar echo”.

CAUTION:

The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.

CAUTION:

The GDU 104X PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM

THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.

NOTE:

All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system. Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with

California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


iii

REVISION INFORMATION

Record of Revisions

Part Number Revision Date Page Range

190-00592-00 A 11/10/05 i – I-6

190-00592-01 A 6/16/06 i – I-4

Description

Initial release (optional fuel pressure gauge information added)

Initial release (GFC 700 AFCS information added) iv


190-00592-01 Rev. A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.1 System Description ..............................................1-1

1.2 Line Replaceable Units ........................................1-2

1.3 Secure Digital (SD) Cards ....................................1-7

1.4 System Power-up ..................................................1-8

1.5 System Operation .................................................1-9

Normal Display Operation

..........................................1-9

Reversionary Display Operation

..................................1-9

G1000 System Annunciations

...................................1-10

AHRS Operation

......................................................1-11

GPS Receiver Operation

...........................................1-12

1.6 G1000 Controls ...................................................1-15

PFD/MFD Controls

...................................................1-15

Softkey Function

......................................................1-17

1.7 Accessing G1000 Functionality ........................1-22

Menus

....................................................................1-22

Data Entry

..............................................................1-22

Page Groups

...........................................................1-23

System Setup and Status

..........................................1-27

System Utilities

........................................................1-36

Electronic Checklists (Optional)

.................................1-40

1.8 Display Backlighting ..........................................1-42

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.1 Introduction ..........................................................2-1

2.2 Flight Instruments ................................................2-4

Airspeed Indicator

.....................................................2-4

Attitude Indicator

......................................................2-6

Altimeter

..................................................................2-7

Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator

........................2-9

Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

......................................2-9

Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

...........................2-10

DME Information Window

........................................2-16

2.3 Supplemental Flight Data .................................2-17

Timer/References Window

........................................2-17

Outside Air Temperature

...........................................2-18

System Time

............................................................2-19

2.4 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions .....2-20

Alerts Window

.........................................................2-20

Annunciation Window

..............................................2-20

Softkey Annunciations

..............................................2-21

Marker Beacon Annunciations

..................................2-21

Traffic Annunciation

.................................................2-22

Altitude Alerting

......................................................2-22

Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude

.......................2-23

SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

3.1 Engine Display ......................................................3-2

3.2 Lean Display ..........................................................3-4

3.3 System Display .....................................................3-6

SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.1 Overview ...............................................................4-1

PFD/MFD Controls and Frequency Display

....................4-2

Audio Panel Controls

.................................................4-4

4.2 COM Operation .....................................................4-6

COM Transceiver Selection and Activation

....................4-6

Stuck Microphone

......................................................4-7

COM Transceiver Manual Tuning

.................................4-8

COM Tuning Failure

....................................................4-9

Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz

...................4-9

Auto-tuning the COM Frequency

...............................4-10

Frequency Spacing

...................................................4-13

Automatic Squelch

...................................................4-14

4.3 NAV Operation ....................................................4-15

NAV Radio Selection and Activation

..........................4-15

NAV Receiver Manual Tuning

....................................4-16

Auto-tuning the NAV Frequency

................................4-18

Marker Beacon Receiver

...........................................4-21

ADF/DME Tuning (Optional)

......................................4-22

4.4 GTX 33 Mode S Transponder .............................4-26

Transponder Softkey Controls

...................................4-26

Transponder Mode Selection

.....................................4-27

Flight ID Reporting

..................................................4-31

4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions ....................4-32

Power-up and Fail-safe Operation

.............................4-32

Mono/Stereo Headsets

.............................................4-32

Speaker

..................................................................4-32

Intercom

.................................................................4-33

Passenger Address (PA) System

.................................4-34

Clearance Recorder and Player

..................................4-35

Entertainment Inputs

...............................................4-35

Reversionary Mode

..................................................4-36

4.6 Preflight Procedure for the Audio Panel .........4-37

190-00592-01 Rev. A


v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION

5.1 Navigation Map (MFD) ........................................5-2

Navigation Map Page Setup and Operation

..................5-2

5.2 PFD Inset Map and Windows ............................5-24

Inset Map

...............................................................5-24

PFD Windows

..........................................................5-25

5.3 Direct-to-Navigation (MFD) ..............................5-26

Direct-to Navigation Shortcuts from the MFD

.............5-30

5.4 Direct-to-Navigation (PFD) ..............................5-31

5.5 Airport Information ...........................................5-33

5.6 Intersection Information ...................................5-38

5.7 NDB Information ................................................5-40

5.8 VOR Information .................................................5-42

5.9 User Waypoint Information ...............................5-44

5.10 Nearest Airports .................................................5-49

5.11 Nearest Airports (PFD) .......................................5-52

5.12 Nearest Intersections .........................................5-54

5.13 Nearest NDB .......................................................5-55

5.14 Nearest VOR ........................................................5-56

5.15 Nearest Frequencies ..........................................5-59

5.16 Nearest Airspaces ...............................................5-62

5.17 Nearest User Waypoint ......................................5-66

5.18 Flight Planning ....................................................5-68

Flight Planning from the MFD

...................................5-68

Vertical Navigation

..................................................5-84

Flight Planning from the PFD

....................................5-86

5.19 Procedures ..........................................................5-90

Departures, Arrivals, and Approaches (MFD)

...............5-90

Departures, Arrivals, and Approaches (PFD)

..............5-100

SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.1 XM WX Satellite Weather ....................................6-1

Activating XM Services

...............................................6-1

Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products

.....................6-2

XM WX Satellite Weather on the Navigation Map

.........6-9

Weather Softkeys

.....................................................6-11

6.2 Terrain Proximity ....................................................6-27

Limitations

..............................................................6-29

Terrain Proximity Page

..............................................6-29

Navigation Map Page

...............................................6-31

6.3 Traffic Information Service (TIS) ..........................6-33

TIS Symbology

.........................................................6-34

Traffic Map Page

.....................................................6-35

SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.1 AFCS Overview .....................................................7-1

AFCS Controls on the MFD

.........................................7-2

Additional AFCS Controls

...........................................7-3

7.2 Flight Director Operation ......................................7-4

Activating the Flight Director

......................................7-4

Command Bars

..........................................................7-4

AFCS Status Box

........................................................7-5

7.3 Flight Director Modes ..........................................7-6

Pitch Modes

..............................................................7-7

Roll Modes

..............................................................7-14

7.4 Autopilot Operation ...........................................7-19

Flight Control

..........................................................7-19

Engaging the Autopilot

............................................7-19

Control Wheel Steering

............................................7-20

Disengaging the Autopilot

........................................7-20

7.5 Example Procedures ...........................................7-21

7.6 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts ........................7-28

AFCS Status Alerts

...................................................7-28

Overspeed Protection

...............................................7-29

SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.1 XM Digital Audio Entertainment (Optional) .....8-1

XM Satellite Radio Service

..........................................8-1

XM Information Page

.................................................8-2

XM Radio Page

..........................................................8-3

APPENDICES

Annunciations and Alerts ..............................................A-1

SD Card Use ....................................................................B-1

Glossary ...........................................................................C-1

Frequently Asked Questions .........................................D-1

G1000 Map Datums .......................................................E-1

General TIS Information ................................................ F-1

Map Symbols ................................................................. G-1

INDEX

vi


190-00592-01 Rev. A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B

LANK

P

AGE

190-00592-01 Rev. A


vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B

LANK

P

AGE

viii


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.

The G1000 is an integrated flight deck system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):

• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)

•

GDU 1042

Multi Function Display (MFD)

•

GMA 1347

Audio Panel with Integrated Marker

Beacon Receiver

•

GIA 63

Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)

•

GDC 74

Air Data Computer (ADC)

• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit

•

•

GRS 77

Attitude and Heading Reference System

•

•

•

•

GTX 33

(AHRS)

GMU 44

GDL 69/69A

GSA 81

GSM 85

Mode S Transponder

Magnetometer

Data Link Receiver

AFCS Servos

Servo Mounts

Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2.

The Diamond DA40/40F may also be optionally equipped with a GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System

(AFCS), providing flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), and manual electric trim (MET) functions of the G1000

System.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-1

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS

• GDU 1040/1042 (2) – A GDU 1040 is configured as the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a GDU 1040 or

1042 (for airframes equipped with the GFC 700) as a Multi Function Display (MFD). Both displays feature

10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with each other through a

High-speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.

•

GMA 1347

– The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom, and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control of display Reversionary Mode (red

DISPLAY BACKUP

button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and communicates with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.

• GIA 63 (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communications hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD. Each IAU contains very high frequency (VHF) communication/navigation/glideslope (COM/

NAV/GS) receivers and system integration microprocessors and is paired with the on-side display via an HSDB connection. The IAUs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.

1-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GDC 74

– The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air temperature

(OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the

G1000 System, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface.

•

GEA 71

– The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.

• GTX 33 – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with both IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.

• GRS 77 (2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both the PFD and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors

(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed in Section 1.5, System Operation.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-3

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

•

GMU 44

– The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with it via an RS-485 digital interface.

•

GDL 69A

– The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to MFD maps and the

PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio Service is required to enable Data Link Receiver capability.

•

GSA 81 and

GSM 85

– The GSA 81 servos are used for automatic control of pitch, pitch trim, and roll. These units interface with each IAU.

The GSM 85 servo mounts are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo actuators to the mechanical flight-control surface linkages.

1-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

����

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

����

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Figure 1-1 Basic G1000 System Block Diagram

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-5

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Figure 1-2 G1000 With Optional/Additional Interfaces

NOTE:

For information on additional equipment shown in Figure 1-2, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.

1-6


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.3 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS

NOTE:

Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.

NOTE:

Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.

The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.

Ins talling an SD card:

1)

2)

Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).

To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.

SD Card Slots

Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-7

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.4 SYSTEM POWER-UP

NOTE:

See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply operation.

NOTE:

Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.

The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.

During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.

On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both while taxiing and during level flight.

When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-5) displays the following information:

• System version • Obstacle database name and version

• Copyright

• Land database name and version

• Terrain database name and version

• Aviation database name, version, and effective dates

Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to continue.

Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.

1-8

Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization Figure 1-5 MFD Power-Up Splash Screen


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION

The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in

Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. Normal and reversionary G1000 display operation, as well as the various AHRS modes and G1000 System Annunciations are discussed here.

NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION

In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see the GPS Navigation Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System

(EIS; see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.

Figure 1-6 G1000 Normal Operation

REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION

NOTE:

The G1000 System alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to Appendix A for further information regarding system-specific alerts.

NOTE:

In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.

In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In

Reversionary Mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format as in normal operating mode.

If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-9

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the

Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.

NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the failed PFD) are flagged as invalid.

Pressing the

DISPLAY BACKUP Button also

activates/deactivates Reversionary Mode.

Figure 1-7 G1000 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)

G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS

When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing failed data (Figure 1-8 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.

Upon G1000 power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.

GIA 63 GIA 63

GRS 77 or GMU 44

1-10

GEA 71 or

GIA 63

GDC 74

Figure 1-8 G1000 System Failure Annunciations


GDC 74

GIA 63

GTX 33 or GIA 63

GIA 63

190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

AHRS OPERATION

NOTE:

Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.

The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration calculations for the G1000 System, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information from its internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.

Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts (refer to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information). Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).

GPS INPUT FAILURE

Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid.

MAGNETOMETER FAILURE

If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.

AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE

Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information.

GPS

Magnetometer

Airspeed Data

��

��

��

AHRS Normal

Operation

AHRS no-

Mag Mode

AHRS no-Mag/ no-Air Mode

Heading Invalid

AHRS no-GPS

Mode

Attitude/Heading Invalid

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 1-9 AHRS Operation


1-11

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GPS RECEIVER OPERATION

Each GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.

Viewing GPS receiver status information:

1)

2)

Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.7 for information on navigating MFD page groups).

Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).

Selecting the GPS receiver for which data is displayed:

1)

2)

Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS Status Page.

To change the selected GPS receiver:

a)

Press the desired GPS Softkey.

OR

:

a)

Press the MENU Key.

b)

Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.

Satellite Constellation

Diagram

Satellite Signal

Information Status

GPS Receiver

Status

RAIM

Availability

Prediction

Satellite Signal

Strength Bars

1-12

Figure 1-10 GPS Status Page


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The GPS Status Page provides the following information:

• Satellite constellation diagram

Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing

45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.

Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.

• Satellite signal information status

The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.

EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.

DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM, measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.

The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.

• GPS receiver status

The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.

When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 2D NAV is indicated as the solution since GPS altitude cannot be computed using the acquired satellite signal data. When differential

GPS (DGPS) signals are available, the solution status is indicated as 2D DIFF NAV or 3D DIFF NAV.

• RAIM Prediction

Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.

The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.

Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The

G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-13

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Predicting RAIM availability:

1)

2)

3)

Select the GPS Status Page.

Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.

Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.

4)

Enter the desired waypoint:

a)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000.

OR

:

a)

Use the large FMS Knob to scroll to the Most Recent Waypoints List.

b)

Use the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint in the list and press the ENT Key. The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.

c)

Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.

OR

:

a)

To use the present position, press the MENU Key.

b)

With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

c)

Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.

5)

6)

7)

Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.

Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.

With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of the following is displayed:

• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths

The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:

- No signal strength bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite

- Hollow signal strength bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data

- Solid signal strength bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used

- Checkered signal strength bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)

Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).

1-14


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.6 G1000 CONTROLS

The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and Audio

Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about Audio Panel and NAV/COM controls. AFCS controls (on the bezel of the MFD) are described in the AFCS section.

PFD/MFD CONTROLS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11

12

16

13

14

15

18 17

Figure 1-11 PFD/MFD Controls

1

2

3

4

5

NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)

Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio on/off

Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies NAV Frequency

Transfer Key

NAV Knob Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)

Heading Knob

Joystick

Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2

Turn to manually select a heading

Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the Horizontal Situation

Indicator (HSI) and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading

Turn to change map range

Press to activate Map Pointer and move in desired direction to pan map

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-15

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1-16

6

7

8

9

10

11

CRS/BARO Knob Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting

Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)

COM Knob

Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/station

Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)

Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2

COM Frequency

Transfer Key

(EMERG)

The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).

Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies

Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency field

COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM

Frequency Box)

Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on/off

Direct-to Key ( ) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the active route)

FPL Key Displays flight plan information

12

13

14

CLR Key

(DFLT MAP)

MENU Key

PROC Key

15

ENT Key

Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus

Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).

Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes

Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport

Validates/confirms selection or data entry

16

17

18

FMS Knob Press to turn the selection cursor on/off

(Flight Management

System Knob)

Data Entry: With cursor on, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location)

Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor on, turn large knob to scroll through the list.

Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)

Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display Softkey Selection

Keys

ALT Knob Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner) and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.

Large (Outer)

Knob

Small (Inner)

Knob

Figure 1-12 Dual Concentric Knob

SOFTKEY FUNCTION

The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.

In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted with bullets.

Bezel-Mounted

Softkeys (Press)

Softkey

On

Softkey Selection

Box (Light Blue)

Softkey Names

(Displayed)

Figure 1-13 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)

PFD SOFTKEYS

The

CDI

,

IDENT

,

TMR/REF

,

NRST,

and

ALERTS

softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.

The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).

INSET PFD OBS CDI

(optional)

ADF/DME XPDR IDENT TMR/REF NRST ALERTS

INSET

Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources:

- GPS

- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)

- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

Figure 1-14 Top-level PFD Softkeys

190-00592-01 Rev. A

OFF DCLTR

DCLTR-1

DCLTR-2

DCLTR-3

TRAFFIC TOPO TERRAIN

(optional) (optional)

NEXRAD XM LTNG

PFD

BACK ALERTS

1-17

METRIC DFLTS

(optional)

DME BRG 1 360 HSI ARC HSI BRG 2 STD BARO BACK ALERTS

Press the BRG1/BRG2 softkeys to display/ remove the Bearing Information windows and cycle through bearing sources:

- NAV1/NAV2

- GPS

- ADF

Press the STD BARO or BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

XPDR

0 1

STBY ON ALT

2 3 4 5

VFR CODE IDENT

6

BACK ALERTS

Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

7 IDENT BKSP BACK ALERTS

Press the IDENT or BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

• INSET Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner

OFF Removes Inset Map

DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:

DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible

DCLTR-1: Removes land data

DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data

DCLTR-3: Removes everything except active flight plan

TRAFFIC

TOPO

Displays/removes traffic information on Inset Map

INSET PFD OBS CDI

(optional)


Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Inset Map

TERRAIN Displays/removes terrain information on Inset Map

NEXRAD

XM LTNG

Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)

Displays/removes XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)


- GPS

- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)

- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

INSET

1-18

OFF DCLTR TRAFFIC TOPO TERRAIN


NEXRAD XM LTNG BACK ALERTS

DCLTR-1

DCLTR-2

DCLTR-3

Press the OFF or BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

PFD

Figure 1-15 INSET Softkeys

• PFD Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration

METRIC Displays Selected and current altitudes additionally in meters and changes barometric

DFLTS

METRIC setting to hectopascals (hPa) from inches of mercury (in Hg)

DFLTS DME BRG 1 360 HSI ARC HSI

BRG

2 STD BARO BACK

Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard

ALERTS

DME

BRG1

Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)

Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:

NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information

GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information

BRG1/BRG2 softkeys to display/ remove the Bearing Information windows

ADF: Waypoint frequency

Off: Removes window


360 HSI Displays the HSI as a 360° compass rose

XPDR

ARC HSI Displays the HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information Windows unavailable)

0

STBY ON ALT VFR

CODE

IDENT BACK

ALERTS

1

Press the BACK Softkey to return


2 3 4 5 6 7 IDENT BKSP BACK ALERTS

190-00592-01 Rev. A


INSET PFD OBS CDI

(optional)


BRG2

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Press the

CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources:

- GPS

- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)

- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:

INSET

NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information

GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information

ADF: Waypoint frequency

Off: Removes window

TRAFFIC

TOPO TERRAIN


NEXRAD

XM LTNG

ALERTS OFF

• OBS

• CDI

Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)


• ADF/DME Displays/removes ADF/DME Radio Tuning Window (optional; may appear as ADF, DME, or

PFD

METRIC DFLTS

(optional)

DME BRG 1 360 HSI ARC HSI BRG 2 STD BARO BACK ALERTS


- NAV1/NAV2

- GPS

- ADF


Figure 1-16 PFD Configuration Softkeys

XPDR

• XPDR

STBY

ON

ALT

VFR

CODE

0 — 7 0

Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:

Selects standby mode (Transponder does not reply to any interrogations)

Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations)

STBY ON ALT VFR CODE IDENT BACK ALERTS

Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (Transponder replies to identification and altitude interrogations)

Press the BACK Softkey to return

Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)

Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7

2 3 4 5 6 7 IDENT BKSP BACK ALERTS

BKSP

• IDENT

Removes numbers entered, one at a time

Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen to return to the top-level softkeys.

• TMR/REF Displays/removes Timer/References Window

• NRST

• ALERTS

Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window

Displays/removes Alerts Window

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-19

INSET PFD OBS CDI

(optional)



- GPS

- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)

- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

INSET

OFF DCLTR

DCLTR-1

DCLTR-2

DCLTR-3



NEXRAD XM LTNG BACK ALERTS


PFD

METRIC

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

DFLTS

(optional)

DME BRG

1

360 HSI ARC HSI BRG 2 STD BARO BACK ALERTS


- NAV1/NAV2

- GPS

- ADF


XPDR

1-20

1

STBY ON ALT

2 3 4 5

VFR CODE IDENT

6

BACK ALERTS


7 IDENT BKSP BACK ALERTS 0

Figure 1-17 XPDR Softkeys


MFD SOFTKEYS

MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page) softkeys are described here.

ENGINE MAP

DCLTR

DCLTR-1

DCLTR-2

DCLTR-3

Figure 1-18 Navigation Map Page Softkeys

ENGINE

• ENGINE Displays second-level engine softkeys (Figure 1-19; see the EIS Section for more information)

LEAN Displays the EIS Lean Display (softkeys for engine leaning assist are shown when selected)

SYSTEM Displays the EIS System Display (softkeys for fuel calculations are shown when selected)

• MAP Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys

TRAFFIC Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page

TOPO ENGINE LEAN DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL

Map Page

BACK

TERRAIN

NEXRAD

Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page

Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation Map Page

(optional)

BACK Returns to top-level softkeys


(optional)

NEXRAD

(optional)

XM LTNG BACK

190-00592-01 Rev. A

CHKLIST

ENGINE DONE

The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO when the checklist item is already checked.

EXIT EMERGCY

CHKLIST

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

• DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:

ENGINE

ENGINE

DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible

MAP

DCLTR-1: Removes land data

DCLTR

DCLTR

DCLTR-1

DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data

• CHKLIST Displays the Checklist Page; press the EXIT Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys

DCLTR-3

DCLTR-3

ENGINE

ENGINE

ENGINE

ENGINE

ENGINE

ENGINE

LEAN SYSTEM

LEAN

LEAN

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

ENGINE

ENGINE

ENGINE

LEAN SYSTEM

LEAN

LEAN

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

TRAFFIC

TRAFFIC

TRAFFIC

CYL SLCT ASSIST

CYL SLCT

CYL SLCT

ASSIST

ASSIST

BACK

BACK

BACK

DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL BACK

DEC FUEL

DEC FUEL

INC FUEL RST FUEL

INC FUEL RST FUEL

Figure 1-19 ENGINE Softkeys

BACK

BACK



return to the top-level softkeys.

MAP

MAP

MAP

TOPO TERRAIN

TOPO

TOPO

TERRAIN

TERRAIN

(optional)

NEXRAD

(optional)

NEXRAD

NEXRAD

(optional)

XM LTNG

(optional)

XM LTNG

XM LTNG

BACK

BACK

BACK



return to the top-level softkeys.

Figure 1-20 MAP Softkeys

CHKLIST

CHKLIST

CHKLIST

ENGINE DONE

ENGINE

ENGINE

DONE

DONE



when the checklist item is already checked.

EXIT EMERGCY

EXIT

EXIT

EMERGCY

EMERGCY

CHKLIST

CHKLIST

CHKLIST

Figure 1-21 Checklist Softkeys

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-21

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.7 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY

MENUS

NOTE:

No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the

MENU Key while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.

The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.

Navigating a menu:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the MENU Key to display the menu.

Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).

Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.

Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.

No Options for

NRST Window

Options for FPL Window

Figure 1-22 Page Menu Examples

DATA ENTRY

The FMS Knob can be used for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum descent altitude) into the G1000 In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G1000 will try to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters of the identifier.

1-22


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Using the FMS Knob to enter data:

1)

2)

3)

If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.

Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting in the middle at K, and the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls in the opposite direction.

4)

5)

Begin entering data by turning the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.

Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.

Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the field is complete.

6)

7)

Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.

Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).

PAGE GROUPS

NOTE:

Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.

Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen in light blue. In the bottom right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and placement of the current page within the group are indicated by icons. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedure/Weather Information, XM,

Procedure Loading), the title of the page changes while the page icon remains the same.

Page Group Active Page Title

Page Groups Pages in Current Group

MFD Selected Page

Figure 1-23 Page Title and Page Group Icons

There are four main page groups, navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending on the configuration of optional equipment.

Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:

1)

Turn the large FMS

Knob until the desired page group is selected.

2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-23

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

• Map Page Group (MAP)

Navigation Map

Traffic Map

Weather Data Link (optional)

Terrain Proximity

Figure 1-24 Map Pages

• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)

Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages

- Airport Information

(INFO Softkey)

- Departure Information

(DP Softkey)

- Arrival Information

(STAR Softkey)

- Approach Information

(APR Softkey)

- Weather Information (optional)

(WX Softkey)

Intersection Information

NDB Information

VOR Information

User Waypoint Information

Figure 1-25 Waypoint Pages

Airport/Procedures/

Weather Information

Pages

1-24


190-00592-01 Rev. A

• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)

Trip Planning

Utility

GPS Status

System Setup

XM Satellite screens (optional)

- XM Information

(INFO Softkey)

- XM Radio

(RADIO Softkey)

System Status

• Nearest Page Group (NRST)

Nearest Airports

Nearest Intersections

Nearest NDB

Nearest VOR

Nearest User Waypoints

Nearest Frequencies

Nearest Airspaces

Figure 1-26 Auxiliary Pages

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

XM

Pages

Figure 1-27 Nearest Pages

There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is pressed, even if a different page group is selected.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-25

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be used to access the Procedure Loading pages.

The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected by turning the small FMS Knob.

• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)

Active Flight Plan

Flight Plan Catalog

- Stored Flight Plan

(NEW Softkey)

Vertical Navigation

Figure 1-28 Flight Plan Pages

The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.

Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the lower right corner).

• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)

Departure Loading

Arrival Loading

Approach Loading

1-26

Figure 1-29 Procedure Loading Pages

Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SYSTEM SETUP AND STATUS

In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup and System Status. The System

Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System Status Page displays the status of all G1000 System LRUs.

AUX - SYSTEM SETUP PAGE

The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:

• Time display format (local or UTC )

• Displayed measurement units

• Map datum

• Airspace alerts

• Arrival alert

• Audio alert voice

• MFD Data Bar (Navigation Status Box) fields

• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) settings

• COM transceiver channel spacing

• Displayed nearest airports

Figure 1-30 System Setup Page

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-27

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

P

ILOT

P

ROFILES

System settings configured on the System Setup Page may be saved under a pilot profile. The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles; the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created, selected, renamed, or deleted.

Creating a profile:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

2)

Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.

4)

Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.

5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.

6)

In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.

Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.

7)

Press the ENT Key.

8)

With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile

OR

:

Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.

9)

To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.

Selecting an active profile:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.

5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.

Renaming a profile:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.

4)


5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.

6)


1-28


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.

8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

9)

To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

Deleting a profile:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.

4)


5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.

6)


7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

8)

To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

D

ATE

/T

IME

The System Setup Page displays the current date and time and allows the pilot to set the time format

(local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC) and offset in the box labeled ‘Date/Time’. The time offset is used to define current local time. Universal Coordinated Time (UTC; also called Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed. When using a local time format, designate the offset by adding or subtracting the desired number of hours from UTC.

Setting the system time format:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time format field in the Date/Time Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired system time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC).

5)


Setting the current time offset:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time offset field in the Date/Time Box.

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the time offset and press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-29

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

D

ISPLAY

U

NITS

The Display Units Box on the System Setup Page allows configuration of the measurement units used for the following displayed data:

• Navigation angle (auto, true)

• Distance and speed (metric, nautical)

• Altitude and vertical speed (feet, meters)

• Barometric pressure (inches of mercury, hectopascals)

• Air temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit)

• Fuel and fuel flow (gallons, imperial gallons, kilograms, liters, pounds)

• Position (HDDD°MM.MM’, HDDD°MM’SS.S”,

MGRS, UTM/UPS)

For the navigation angle, if ‘Auto’ is selected, all track, course, and heading information is corrected to the computed magnetic variation (MAG VAR) shown in the Display Units Box . The ‘True’ setting references all information to true north.

Units of display for the flight instruments are unaffected when the display units for distance, speed, altitude, and vertical speed are changed. Displayed engine parameter temperatures and pressures also remain unaffected when display units for temperature or pressure are changed. Changing the fuel and fuel flow units affects the display of parameters only on the AUX - Trip Planning Page.

Changing a display units setting:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units.

5)

6)

Press the ENT Key when the desired unit is highlighted.

To cancel the process without changing the units, press the CLR Key.

M

AP

D

ATUM

The Map Datum Box on the System Setup Page allows selection of the map datum to be used by the

G1000 from a list of datums available in the current aviation database. The aviation database contains over

100 map datums to adjust position reading to conform to specific paper charts (see Appendix E for a list of available map datums.). The default datum setting is WSG 84. Per TSO C129a, the WSG 84 map datum should be used in the United States.

For use outside the U.S., select the geodetic datum required by that country. If charts based on another datum are being used, the G1000 should be set to use the same datum. Using a map datum that does not match the paper charts can result in significant differences in position information. If paper charts are being used for reference only, the G1000 still provides correct navigation guidance to the waypoints contained in the database, regardless of the datum selected.

Changing the map datum:


2)


1-30


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the datum in the Map Datum Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the list of available map datums.

5)

Press the ENT Key when the desired datum is highlighted.

A

IRSPACE

A

LERTS

The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an airspace. Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off in the Airspace Alerts Box:

• Class B/TMA

• Class C/TCA

• Class D

• Restricted

• MOA (Military)

• Other airspaces

An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message will not be generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.

Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.

Turning an airspace alert on or off:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.

A

RRIVAL

A

LERTS

The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).

Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-31

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.

Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.

A

UDIO

A

LERTS

The Audio Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows the audio alert voice to be set to male or female.

Changing the audio alert voice:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice.

5)


MFD D

ATA

B

AR

F

IELDS

The MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the System Setup Page can be used to change the configuration of the data fields in the Navigation Status Box on the MFD. By default, the Navigation Status Box is set to display ground speed (GS), distance to next waypoint (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), and enroute safe altitude (ESA). The Navigation Status Box on the PFD is not affected.

The following data may be selected for display in the four fields of the MFD Navigation Status Box.

• Bearing (BRG)

• Distance (DIS)

• Desired Track (DTK)

• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)

• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)

• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)

• Ground Speed (GS)

• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)

• Track Angle Error (TKE)

• Track (TRK)

• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)

• Crosstrack Error (XTK)

1-32


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Changing the information shown in an MFD Navigation Status Box field:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.

2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the data options list.

5)


GPS CDI

The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen Course

Deviation Indicator (CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is ‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and gradually ramps up to 5 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 5.0 nautical miles during the enroute phase of flight. Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range gradually ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down even further to 0.3 nm. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).

If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the G1000 uses this for enroute and terminal phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity

Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.

The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page displays the following:

• Selected CDI range (Auto, 5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)

• Current system CDI range (5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)

• ILS CDI capture mode setting (Auto, Manual)

Changing the CDI range:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the selected field in the GPS CDI Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the range list.

5)


Changing the ILS CDI capture setting:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ILS CDI capture field in the GPS CDI Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired mode.

5)


190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-33

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

COM C

ONFIGURATION

The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz

COM frequency channel spacing.

Changing COM channel spacing:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing.

5)


N

EAREST

A

IRPORTS

The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and “any” for runway surface type.

Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (any, hard only, hard/soft, water).

5)


Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:


2)


3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.

1-34


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

AUX - SYSTEM STATUS PAGE

The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.

Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Diamond service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.

Figure 1-31 Example System Status Page

The LRU, ARFRM, and DBASE softkeys on the System Status Page select the box (LRU Info, Airframe, or Database) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll if all the information cannot appear on the screen. The cursor can also be placed in the desired box using the System Status Page Menu.

The ANN TEST Softkey, when depressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-35

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SYSTEM UTILITIES

For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility

Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset. A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Alerts Window on the PFD (see Figure 1-33).

1-36

Figure 1-32 Utility Page

T

IMERS

The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are zeroed.

Setting the generic timer:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.

2)


3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

4) If a desired starting time is desired:

5) a)

Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.

b)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.

Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to

‘STOP?’.

6)

7)

To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.

To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the digits are reset.

The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.

Setting the flight timer starting criterion:


2)

3)


Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and pr ess the ENT Key.

Resetting the flight timer:


2) Press the MENU Key.

3)

With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from the System Setup Page.

Setting the departure timer starting criterion:


2)

3)


Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and pr ess the ENT Key.

Resetting the departure time:



3)

Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


1-37

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

T

RIP

S

TATISTICS

The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.

Resetting trip statistics readouts:


2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:

• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer

2)

• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only

• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only

• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts

Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and pr ess the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.

S

CHEDULER

The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”, “Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”). Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.

Entering a scheduler message:

2)

3)

4)

5)



Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.

Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.

Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.

6)

Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:

• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time

• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)

7)

8)

• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero

Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.

For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to countdown and press the ENT Key.

1-38


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

9)

For event-based messages:

a)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.

b)

Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.

c)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.

10)

Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.

Deleting a scheduler message:


2)

3)

4)

5)


Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.

Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.

Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.

Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD and cause the ALERTS Softkey label to change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey revers to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.

Alerts

Window

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 1-33 PFD Alerts Window


1-39

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL)

NOTE:

The checklists presented in this section are for example only and may not reflect checklists actually available for the Diamond DA40/40F. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.

NOTE:

Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. User-defined checklists are created by the aircraft manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer. The user cannot edit these checklists.

NOTE:

Checklists cannot be edited from within the system. Refer to the Garmin Aviation Checklist Editor

(ACE) User’s Guide for information on creating and editing checklists.

The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists, customized for the Diamond DA40/40F, which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The G1000 accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into the bezel slot (see Figure 1-3). If the SD card contains a valid checklist file, the power-up splash screen displays both the aircraft make and model to which the checklist applies (e.g., DA40, Diamond Aircraft Industries) and copyright information. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Checklist Page displays ‘INVALID CHECKLIST’ or ‘CHECKLIST

NOT PRESENT’ and the CHKLIST Softkey is greyed out.

1-40

Figure 1-34 Checklist Page Example


190-00592-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Accessing and navigating checklists:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

From any page, select the CHKLIST Softkey.

Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.

Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.

Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key.

6)

Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the checklist and highlight the desired checklist item (has a hollow white box for checkmark).

The following colors are used for checklist items:

• Blue - Items has not been highlighted

• White - Item is highlighted for selection

• Green - Item has been selected

• Yellow - Warning notes

7)

Press the CLR Key to remove a check mark from an item.

8)

Once the last item in a checklist is selected, ‘Go to the next checklist?’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist displayed.

9)

Press the ENT Key or DONE Softkey to select the highlighted checklist item (item turns green and a checkmark is placed in the box next to the item). The next item is automatically highlighted for selection.

Press the EXIT Softkey or hold down the CLR Key momentarily to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.

Immediately accessing emergency procedures:

1)

2)

From any page, select the CHKLIST Softkey.

Press the EMERGCY Softkey.

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 1-35 Sample Checklist


1-41

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.8 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING

The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.

Adjusting display backlighting:

1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.

3)

Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.

4)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.

6)

To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.

Adjusting key backlighting:

1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.

3)

Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.

5)

6)

Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.

Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.

7)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.

8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.

9)

Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.

10)

To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.

1-42

PFD

Figure 1-36 PFD Setup Menu


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.1 INTRODUCTION

WARNING:

In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup instruments.

NOTE:

The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display during certain AFCS modes.

The G1000 System controls were designed so that regardless of which seat the pilot is flying from, the aircraft can be flown with one hand and the controls manipulated with the other hand. Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instrument “six-pack” on the instrument panel with an easy-to-scan display that provides a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information.

In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, annunciations, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide

The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:

• Airspeed Indicator, showing

– True airspeed

– Airspeed awareness ranges

– Trend vector

– Reference flags

• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication

• Altimeter, showing

– Trend vector

– Barometric setting

– Selected Altitude

• Vertical Deviation/Glideslope

Indicator

• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing

– Heading and course indications

– Turn Rate Indicator

– Navigation source

– Course Deviation Indicator

(CDI)

– Bearing pointers and information windows

– DME Information Window

The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.

• Outside air temperature (OAT)

• System time

• Timer/References Window, showing

– Generic timer

– Vspeed values and flags

– Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA, DH)

– Flight ID (see Audio Panel and

CNS Section)

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-1

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

1 21 20 19 18 17

2

3

4

5

6

7

7

8

5

6

9

10

11

3

4

1

2

NAV Frequency Box

Airspeed Indicator

True Airspeed

Current Heading

Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)

Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

Softkeys

System Time

Transponder Data Box

Selected Heading Bug

Turn Rate Indicator

18

19

20

21

14

15

12

13

16

17

Altimeter Barometric Setting

Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

Selected Altitude Bug

Altimeter

Selected Altitude

COM Frequency Box

AFCS Status Box

Navigation Status Box

Slip/Skid Indicator

Attitude Indicator

Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)

13

9

8

12

11

10

16

15

14

2-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

11 10

1

9

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

Traffic Annunciation

Selected Heading

Inset Map

Bearing Information Windows

Selected Course

ADF/DME Tuning Window

4 5

9

10

11

7

8

Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude

Annunciation Window

Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator

Marker Beacon Annunciation

AFCS Status Annunciation

Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information

7

8

6

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-3

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

AIRSPEED INDICATOR

NOTE:

Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) for speed criteria.

The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The true airspeed is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator.

The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed speed (V

NE

), at which point it turns red.

Airspeed

Trend Vector

Actual

Airspeed

Speed

Ranges

Vspeed Reference

True Airspeed

Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator

Figure 2-4 Red Pointer at V

NE

SPEED AWARENESS RANGES

A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (V

NE yellow ranges are also present for low speed awareness.

). Red and

AIRSPEED TREND VECTOR

The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down on the airspeed scale, shown to the right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in 6 seconds if the current rate of acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses V

NE

, the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.

2-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

VSPEED REFERENCES

NOTE:

Refer to the AFMS for Vspeed values.

Vspeeds (Glide, V

R

, V

X

, and V

Y

) can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References

Window. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed values are reset and all flags turned off when power is cycled.

Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:

1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field of the desired Vspeed to be changed.

3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired value and press the ENT Key (when a speed has been changed from a default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).

4) With the flag ON/OFF field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.

5)

To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.

Figure 2-5 Timer/References Window Figure 2-6 Timer/References Menu

Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:



3) To activate all Vspeed flags, press the ENT Key with ‘All References On’ highlighted.

4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References Off’ and press the ENT Key.

Restoring all Vspeed defaults:



3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-5

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ATTITUDE INDICATOR

NOTE:

Some supplemental PFD information disappears when pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚.

Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The

Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.

9

1

2

3

4

8

7

6

5

4

3

5

1

2

8

9

6

7

Roll Pointer

Roll Scale

Horizon Line

Aircraft Symbol

Land Representation

Pitch Scale

Slip/Skid Indicator

Sky Representation

Roll Scale Zero

Figure 2-7 Attitude Indicator

PITCH INDICATION

The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to

25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below and 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks occur every 2.5˚.

Red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the horizon are displayed, starting at 50˚ above and

30˚ below the horizon line.

2-6

Nose High Nose Low

Figure 2-8 Pitch Attitude Warnings


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ROLL AND SLIP/SKID INDICATION

The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.

The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional

Slip/Skid Indicator.

Figure 2-9 Slip/Skid Indication

ALTIMETER

The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20 feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.

Selected

Altitude Bug

Selected

Altitude

Selected

Altitude

(Meters)

Altitude

Trend

Vector

Current

Altitude

Current

Altitude

(Meters)

Barometric

Setting

Figure 2-10 Altimeter

Barometric

Setting Box

(Hectopascals)

Figure 2-11 Altimeter (Metric)

ALTITUDE TREND VECTOR

A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-7

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ALTIMETER BAROMETRIC SETTING

The Altimeter barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals (hPa) when the METRIC Softkey is pressed.

Selecting the Altimeter barometric setting:

Turn the BARO (outer) Knob to select the desired setting.

Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):

1)

2)

Press the PFD Softkey.

Press the STD BARO Softkey.

SELECTED ALTITUDE

NOTE:

See the AFCS Section for more information on how the G1000 uses the Selected Altitude.

The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. The metric value, when selected, is displayed in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.

Setting the Selected Altitude:

Turn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small for 100-ft increments).

METRIC DISPLAY

Selected and current altitudes can be displayed in meters (readouts displayed above the normal readouts in feet) and the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (see Figure 2-11). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.

Displaying altitude and the Altimeter barometric setting in metric units:

1)

2)

3)

Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.

Press the METRIC Softkey to display altitudes in meters and the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals.


2-8


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

VERTICAL DEVIATION/GLIDESLOPE INDICATOR

The Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears to the left of the Altimeter when an ILS is tuned in the active NAV field (and selected on the Audio Panel). A green diamond appears and acts as the

Vertical Deviation Indicator, just like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator.

VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)

NOTE:

Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm.

The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-13) displays the aircraft’s vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at 1000 and 2000 fpm in each direction on the non-moving tape. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 fpm.

The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer, which also points to that speed on the non-moving tape.

If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.

Marker

Beacon

Annunciation

Vertical

Deviation/

Glideslope

Indicator

Vertical

Speed

Pointer

Figure 2-12 Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator Figure 2-13 Vertical Speed Indicator

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-9

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)

The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. The HSI presents heading, turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).

Changing the HSI display format:

1)

2)

Press the PFD Softkey

Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.

The 360˚ HSI (Figure 2-14) contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From

Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and

LOC1) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.

14 13

8

7

12

11

10

9

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

Turn Rate Indicator

Lateral Deviation Scale

Navigation Source

Aircraft Symbol

Course Deviation Indicator

(CDI)

Rotating Compass Card

OBS Mode Active

13

14

10

11

8

9

12

TO/FROM Indicator

Heading Bug

Course Pointer

Flight Phase

Turn Rate and Heading

Trend Vector

Current Heading

Lubber Line

Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)

The Arc HSI (Figure 2-15) is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course

Pointer, To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).

Course Pointer

Navigation Source

Lateral Deviation Scale

Flight Phase

Annunciation

Course Deviation and

TO/FROM Indicator

Figure 2-15 Arc HSI

2-10


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

HEADING AND COURSE INDICATIONS

NOTE:

See the AFCS Section for more information on Selected Heading functions.

A digital reading of the current magnetic heading appears on top of the HSI. The heading displayed on the

HSI is always magnetic, even if the navigation angle (‘Nav Angle’) format is ‘True’ on the AUX - System Setup

Page on the MFD (see the System Overview for details).

When the pilot selects a course by rotating the CRS Knob, a digital reading appears for 3 seconds in a box to the right of the lubber line, next to the HSI. Pressing the CRS Knob displays the digital reading, re-centers the CDI, and returns the course pointer pointing to the bearing of the active waypoint or navigation station

(see OBS Mode for information on adjusting a GPS course).

When the pilot selects a heading by rotating the HDG Knob, a digital reading appears for 3 seconds in a box to the left of the lubber line, next to the HSI. A rotatable heading bug marks the desired heading on the

HSI. This Selected Heading Bug and the current aircraft heading can be synchronized by pressing the HDG

Knob, which moves the bug to the current heading.

Selected

Heading

Current

Heading

Selected

Heading Bug

Selected

Course

Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications

TURN RATE INDICATOR

The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present turn rate. At rates greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid (Figure 2-17).

A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading (Figure 2-18).

Half-Std Turn Rate

Std Turn Rate

Arrow Shown for Turn Rate >

4 deg/sec

Figure 2-17 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector

Turn Rate

Trend Vector

Figure 2-18 Standard-Rate Turn Indication

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-11

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

NAVIGATION SOURCE

The HSI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer, and glideslope). The CDI

Softkey cycles through the navigation sources. Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta (for

GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC).

2-12

Figure 2-19 Navigation Sources with Example HSI Annunciations

The following annunciations appear in yellow on the HSI to indicate abnormal GPS conditions:

• ‘INTEG’: Loss of Integrity–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight

• ‘WARN’: GPS position error

Changing navigation sources:

1)

2)

3)

Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The light blue tuning box is placed over the NAV1 standby frequency in the NAV Frequency Box.

Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The light blue tuning box is placed over the NAV2 standby frequency.

Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.

A

UTOMATIC

N

AVIGATION

S

OURCE

S

WITCHING

On the AUX - System Setup Page, ‘ILS CDI Capture’ may be changed to ‘Manual’. In ‘Auto’ (default) setting, the system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly when:

• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan

• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving toward the FAF

• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned

• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

GPS steering guidance is still provided after the HSI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a Vectors-to-Final (VTF) approach (see the GPS Navigation Section) also causes the HSI to switch to LOC navigation source, although the change is not considered automatic to the system and GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.

Changing the ILS CDI Capture setting:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.

Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘ILS CDI Capture’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ Box.

Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.

OBS M

ODE

NOTE:

The OBS Softkey is available only when navigating an active leg using GPS.

Enabling Omni Bearing Selector (OBS) Mode (with the OBS Softkey) suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current

“active-to” waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. When OBS is disabled

(the OBS Softkey is pressed again), the GPS returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints. OBS Mode also allows a desired course to/from a waypoint to be set (with the CRS Knob); pressing the CRS Knob re-centers the CDI and returns the course pointer to the waypoint bearing.

As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI (to the lower right of the aircraft symbol) in place of ‘OBS’ and the OBS Softkey label changes to SUSP. Pressing the SUSP Softkey resumes automatic of approach waypoints.

Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating with GPS:

1)

2)

3)

Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.

Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint.

Press the OBS Softkey again to return to normal operation.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-13

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR

NOTE:

If the pilot makes a heading change greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc

HSI switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.

The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course (Figure 2-20).

360º HSI

Arc HSI

CDI

CDI

Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator

The CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI when coupled to a VOR or LOC. When coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived distance (5.0, 1.0, or 0.3 nm). The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page, and the scale setting may also be changed (5.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page (Figure 2-21). When set to

‘Auto’ (default), the CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the current phase of flight:

• Leaving the departure airport the CDI scale is set to 1.0 nm and gradually ramps up to 5.0 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport

• The CDI scale is set to 5.0 nm during the enroute phase of flight

• Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI scale gradually ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area)

• During approach operations, the CDI scale ramps down even further to 0.3 nm. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).

If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher scale settings are not selected during any phase of flight and the selected setting is displayed instead of the flight phase annunciation. For example, if

1.0 nm is selected, the G1000 uses this for enroute and terminal phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phases.

2-14


190-00592-01 Rev. A

Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.


Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Selected’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ Box.

Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Figure 2-21 System Setup Page,

GPS CDI Settings

BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS

NOTE:

Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.

NOTE:

ADF radio installation is optional.

Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. Use the BRG Softkey to cycle through bearing sources (NAV, GPS, ADF). The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer type. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability).

DME Label

Tuning Mode

Frequency

Distance

DME

Information

Window

Bearing 1

Pointer

Bearing 2

Pointer

Distance to

Bearing Source

Station

Identifier

No

Waypoint

Selected

Bearing

Source

Pointer

Icon

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Bearing 1

Information

Window

Bearing 2

Information

Window

Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing and DME Information


Pointer

Icon

Bearing

Source

2-15

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing

Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show:

• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)

• Pointer icon (single line for BRG1, double line for BRG2)

• Frequency (NAV, ADF)

• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)

• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing source

If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency is replaced with “ILS”. If the NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency displayed in the information window is replaced with ‘NO DATA’. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station identifier when the station is within range.

If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency. If an active waypoint is not selected, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and ‘NO DATA’ is displayed in the information window.

Selecting bearing display and changing sources:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Press the PFD Softkey.

Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.

Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.

Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF.

To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.

DME INFORMATION WINDOW

NOTE:

Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.

NOTE:

DME radio installation is optional.

The DME Information Window (Figure 2-22) may be enabled/disabled by pressing the DME Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey).

The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by “–.– – NM”.

2-16


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA

NOTE:

Pressing the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display and the

Inset Map. Pressing this softkey does not restore display units to the default settings.

Some displayed information disappears when pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚. The Altimeter and

Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display and the Bearing

Information and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations.

The following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft experiences unusual attitudes:

• Traffic Annunciations

• AFCS Annunciations

• Flight director Command Bars

• Inset Map

• Outside Air Temperature

• DME Information Window

• Transponder Data Box

• System Time

• PFD Setup Menu

• Windows displayed in the lower right corner

• Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude Box

• Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator

• Altimeter Barometric Setting

• Selected Altitude

TIMER/REFERENCES WINDOW

NOTE:

Refer to Section 2.2 under the Airspeed Indicator discussion for information on Vspeeds and Section

2.4 for information on the barometric minimum descent altitude.

The Timer/References Window is enabled/disabled in the lower right corner of the PFD by pressing the TMR/

REF Softkey. This window provides access to the following settings:

• Generic Timer

• Vspeed values and flags

• Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA, or Decision Height, DH)

Figure 2-27 Timer/References Window

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-17

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

GENERIC TIMER

The PFD generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are zeroed.

Setting the generic timer:


2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the time field (hh/mm/ss).

3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.

4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)


With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.

To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.

To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the digits are reset.


OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode.

Normal Display Reversionary Mode

2-18

Figure 2-23 Outside Air Temperature

Changing temperature display units:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.


Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field (Figure 2-25).

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired unit.

Press the ENT Key to confirm selection.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM TIME

The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Three display formats are available, local

12-hr, local 24-hr, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Time and date are obtained from the GPS satellites and cannot be changed, although a time offset may be entered (±HH:MM) for local times.

Figure 2-24 System Time

Configuring the system time:

4)

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.


Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TIME FORMAT field (Figure 2-26).

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format.

Press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The TIME OFFSET field is highlighted.

Enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM).

Press the ENT Key to confirm selection.


Display Units Settings


Date/Time Settings

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-19

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS

NOTE:

For a detailed description of annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A.

ALERTS WINDOW

Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD) when a warning, caution, advisory alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. This window allows system alerts to be displayed simultaneously.

The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts Window is enabled/disabled by pressing the ALERTS Softkey.

System alert messages are provided to make the pilot aware of G1000 system problems or status and may not require pilot action. The ALERTS Softkey label flashes white when a system alert message is generated.

Pressing the ALERTS Softkey acknowledges the presence of the alert and opens the Alerts Window.

ANNUNCIATION WINDOW

NOTE:

New alerts, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window, separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based on priority.

The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red and cautions in yellow.

Annunciation

Window

Alerts

Window

Figure 2-28 G1000 Alerting System

Softkey

Annunciation

2-20


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

SOFTKEY ANNUNCIATIONS

The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label, and when selected again opens the Alerts Window to display a descriptive message of the alert.

Warnings are time-critical and require immediate pilot attention. A flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation and aural tone (single chime every two seconds) are used to alert the pilot of any warnings. The aural tone and flashing WARNING annunciator continue until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the WARNING

Softkey).

Caution indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require pilot intervention. A flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation and single aural tone (one chime) are used to alert the pilot of any cautions. The flashing CAUTION annunciator continues to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the CAUTION Softkey).

An advisory provides general information to the pilot that may not need immediate attention. A flashing

ADVISORY Softkey annunciation (no aural tone) is used to alert the pilot of any message advisories. The flashing ADVISORY annunciator continues to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the ADVISORY

Softkey).

Figure 2-29 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey labels)

MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS

Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.

Outer Marker Middle Marker Inner Marker

Altimeter

Figure 2-30 Marker Beacon Annunciations

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-21

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION

NOTE:

If a second TA appears or if the number of TAs displayed decreases then increases, new aural and visual alerts are generated.

The G1000 System displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic Information Service (TIS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occurs:

• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic

• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figure 2-30) appears to the top left of the Attitude

Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area

• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is generated

2-22

Figure 2-31 Traffic Annunciation

ALTITUDE ALERTING

The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected

Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is independent of the GFC 700 AFCS, but alerting tones are generated only when the AFCS is present.

The following occurs when approach the Selected Altitude:

• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) changes to black text on a light blue background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.

• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.

• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected

Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.

Within 1000 ft Within 200 ft Deviation of ±200 ft

Figure 2-32 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations


190-00592-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

BAROMETRIC MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE

For altitude awareness, a barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA, or Decision Height, DH) can be set in the Timer/References Window. When active, the MDA is displayed a box labeled “BARO MIN” to the lower left of the Altimeter and on the altitude tape with a bug (once the altitude is within the range of the tape). This altitude can be adjusted in the “BARO MIN” field in the Timer/References Window (Figure 2-33) from zero to 16,000 ft (in 10-ft increments when using the small FMS Knob). The MDA is reset any time the power is cycled.

Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:


2)

3)

4)

5)

Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the BARO MIN field (Figure 2-33).

Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude and press the ENT Key.

In the highlighted ON/OFF field, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.


Figure 2-33 Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude

The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA:

• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the tape in light blue once in range.

• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA, the bug and text turn white.

• Once the aircraft descends past the MDA, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums

Minimums”, is generated.

Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 ft above the MDA.

If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 ft above the MDA, alerting is disabled.

Within 2500 ft Within 100 ft Altitude Reached

Barometric

Minimum Bug

Barometric

Minimum Box

Figure 2-34 Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations

190-00592-01 Rev. A


2-23

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

B

LANK

P

AGE

2-24


190-00592-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Diamond DA40/40F displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations. In

Reversionary Mode, the displays are re-configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with the EIS (refer to the System Overview for information about Reversionary Mode).

EIS Display

Figure 3-1 MFD (DA40)

EIS information is presented in three displays, accessed using the ENGINE Softkey on the MFD:

• Engine Display – Default display; shows all critical engine, fuel, and electrical indicators

• Lean Display – Provides engine leaning information

• System Display – Shows numeric readouts of critical engine, fuel, and electrical indicators

The Engine Manifold Pressure Gauge and Tachometer are shown at the top of all three displays.

Instrument types include dial gauges, horizontal bar indicators, digital readouts, and bar graphs. Green bands indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and warning, respectively. White bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the caution or warning ranges. Readouts, labels, and pointers indicators appear in white to indicate normal operation and may change to yellow or red to indicate caution or warning conditions. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the instrument.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


3-1


3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY

The Engine Display is the default EIS display and can be selected by pressing the ENGINE or BACK Softkey when another EIS display is currently shown. Beneath the dial gauges are horizontal bar indicators for fuel flow, fuel pressure (optional for the DA40 only), oil temperature and pressure, alternator amperage, voltage, and fuel quantity.

1 2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3

5

6

7

8

9

10

DA40

Figure 3-3 Engine Display

DA40F

3-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Engine Manifold Pressure

Gauge (MAN IN)

DA40 only

Tachometer (RPM)

Displays engine power in inches of Mercury (in Hg)

Fuel Flow Indicator

(FUEL FLOW GPH)

Fuel Pressure Indicator

(FUEL PRESS PSI)

DA40 only option

Cylinder Head Temperature

Indicator (CHT)

Oil Temperature Indicator

(OIL TEMP)

Oil Pressure Indicator

(OIL PRES)

Ammeter (AMPS)

Voltmeter (VOLTS)

Fuel Quantity Indicator

(FUEL QTY GAL)

Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band indicates propeller overspeed

Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)

Shows the fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)

Shows the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is shown in pointer)

Engine oil temperature is shown

Pressure of oil supplied to the engine is displayed

Displays the alternator load in amperes

Displays the primary bus voltage

Displays the quantity, in gallons (gal), of fuel in the tanks; pointers labeled L and R indicate the fuel quantity in each tank

Standard Tanks: Indicator ranges from 0 to 20 gal with tick marks every

5 gal; only displays to 17 gal per side when full

Long Range Tanks (optional): Indicator ranges from 0 to 25 gal with tick marks every 5 gal; only displays to 24 gal per side when full

190-00592-01 Rev. A


3-3


3.2 LEAN DISPLAY

NOTE:

The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Aircraft

Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS).

The EIS Lean Display is accessed by pressing the ENGINE Softkey followed by the LEAN Softkey. A readout for fuel flow resides below the tachometer, and beneath this are bar graphs and readouts for Exhaust Gas Temperature

(EGT), EGT deviation from peak, and Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), all in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Bars for cylinders whose exhaust gas and head temperatures are within the normal range are shown in white.

On the CHT Bar Graph, caution or warning conditions for each cylinder are indicated by color change of the bar to yellow or red, respectively. By default, the cylinder with the hottest EGT and CHT is selected (bar indicated in light blue) when the LEAN Softkey is pressed. The readouts below the bar graphs correspond to the selected cylinder.

1 2

3

2

3

4

5

Peak

4

5

6 6

DA40

Figure 3-4 Lean Display

DA40F

3-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A


1

2

3

4

5

6


Gauge (MAN IN)

DA40 only


Tachometer (RPM) Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band indicates propeller overspeed

Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)


Exhaust Gas Temperature

Bar Graph (EGT °F)

EGT Deviation from Peak

(∆ PEAK)

Cylinder Head Temperature

Bar Graph (CHT °F)

Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) for each cylinder is represented as a bar; below the graph, the EGT readout is given for the selected cylinder

(shown in light blue)

A hollow block appears to represent the peak EGT for the selected cylinder when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed

Displays the current EGT deviation from peak for the selected cylinder in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed

Head temperature for each cylinder is represented as a bar; below the graph, the CHT readout is given for the selected cylinder (shown in light blue)

The CYL SLCT and ASSIST softkeys become available after pressing the LEAN Softkey. The CYL SLCT

Softkey can be utilized to cycle through the cylinders and obtain information about a particular cylinder, shown in light blue on the bar graphs. This softkey is disabled when the ASSIST Softkey is pressed or when a cylinder experiences a caution or warning condition; the softkey remains disabled until the temperature returns to normal.

The ASSIST Softkey can be utilized to assist in the leaning process. When a cylinder peaks, its peak is represented by a hollow bar on the EGT bar graph. The EGT readout for the peaked cylinder, indicated in light blue, appears directly beneath the bar graph. When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system automatically switches to the first peak obtained and displays the temperature deviation from peak in degrees Fahrenheit below the EGT readout.

Accessing the EIS Lean Display:

1)

2)

3)

Press the ENGINE Softkey.

Press the LEAN Softkey.

To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.

Monitoring the desired cylinder’s EGT and CHT:

From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its EGT and CHT.

The selected cylinder is shown in light blue.

Selecting the Engine Leaning Assist function:

From the Lean Display, press the ASSIST Softkey to identify the peak. The peak temperature for the selected cylinder is indicated with a hollow block on the EGT Bar Graph and the temperature deviation from peak is shown underneath the EGT Bar Graph.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


3-5


3.3 SYSTEM DISPLAY

NOTE:

Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time the fuel was reset.

NOTE:

Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) for limitations.

The System Display is accessed by pressing the ENGINE Softkey, followed by the SYSTEM Softkey. The readouts presented here, in addition to the dial gauges, are separated into two categories: System and Fuel

Calculation.

Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow totalizer. The fuel remaining can be adjusted using the following softkeys:

• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments

• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments

• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining (GAL REM) relative to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets the displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero

1 2

2

9

11

3

5

7

10

12

4

6

8 9

11

3

5

7

10

12

4

6

3-6

13 13

DA40 DA40F

Figure 3-5 System Display


190-00592-01 Rev. A


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Gauge (MAN IN)

DA40 only

Tachometer (RPM)

Oil Temperature (OIL °F)

Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)

Voltmeter (VOLTS)

Ammeter (AMPS)


Fuel Pressure (FPRESS PSI)

DA40 only option

Fuel Remaining (GAL REM)

10

11

Fuel Used (GAL USED)

Endurance (ENDUR)

12

13

Range (RANGE NM)

Total Time in Service (TTL

TIME IN SVC)


Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red band indicates propeller overspeed

Engine oil temperature is shown in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)

Pressure of oil supplied to the engine is displayed in pounds per square inch (psi)

Shows the primary bus voltage

Shows the alternator load in amperes


Shows the fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)

Current fuel remaining in gallons as set by the pilot and adjusted for fuel burn since last set

Quantity of fuel used in gallons

Flight time remaining with fuel onboard (HH:MM when more than an hour remains)

Aircraft range in nautical miles

Displays the total flight hours and is activated when the aircraft becomes airborne

Accessing the EIS System Display:

1)

2)

3)

Press the ENGINE Softkey.

Press the SYSTEM Softkey.

To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.

Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:

From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to obtain the desired number of gallons remaining (GAL REM).

Resetting the fuel totalizer:

From the System Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This also resets the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to zero.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


3-7


B

LANK

P

AGE

3-8


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.1 OVERVIEW

The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios, navigation radios, and Mode S Transponder. The System Overview section provides a block diagram description of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.

CNS operation in DA40/40F aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):

• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD) • GMA 1347 Audio Panel

• GDU 1040/1042 Multi Function Display (MFD)

• GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)

• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder

The PFD/MFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.

The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.

The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called

Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of background noise from the radios.

The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys located on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) at the lower portion of the screen. The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays a four-digit code field, a mode field, and a reply status indicator.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-1

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

PFD/MFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY

1 2 3 4

5 6

7 8

12

Figure 4-1 PFD/MFD Controls, COM/NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window (PFD Shown)

9

10

11

4-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

1

NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.

2

NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.

3

NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).

Press to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.

4

NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.

5

COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.

6

COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz). Press to move the tuning box (cyan box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and

COM2.

7

COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.

8

COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.

9

ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF and DME frequencies, volume setting, and modes. Display by pressing ADF/DME Softkey.

10

ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection.

11

FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter ADF frequencies and select ADF/DME modes and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.

12

Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status for the Transponder.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-3

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS

9

11

13

15

5

7

17

18

20

1

3

6

8

10

2

4

12

14

16

19

21

22

23

24

Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls (GMA 1347)

NOTE:

When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.

1

COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be added by pressing the COM2 Key.

2

COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.

3

COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 Key.

4

COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.

5

COM3 MIC – Not used in DA40/40F aircraft.

4-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

6

COM3 – Not used in DA40/40F aircraft.

7

COM 1/2 – Not used in DA40/40F aircraft.

8

TEL – Not used in DA40/40F aircraft.

9

PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key is pressed.

10

SPKR – Pressing this key selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the speaker.

11

MKR/MUTE – Selects Marker Beacon Receiver audio. Mutes the currently received Marker Beacon Receiver audio. Un-mutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded

COM audio.

12

HI SENS – Press to increase Marker Beacon Receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.

13

DME – Pressing turns the optional DME audio on or off.

14

NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.

15

ADF – Pressing turns the optional ADF receiver audio on or off.

16

NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.

17

AUX – Not used in DA40/40F aircraft.

18

MAN SQ – Press to enable manual squelch for the intercom. When active, press the PILOT Knob to illuminate ‘SQ’. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.

19

PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.

20

PILOT – Pressing selects the pilot intercom isolation. Press again to deselect pilot isolation.

21

COPLT – Pressing selects the copilot intercom isolation. Press again to deselect copilot isolation.

22

PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by the ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ being illuminated. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch adjustment.

23

PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch adjustment.

24

Reversionary Mode Button – Pressing manually selects Reversionary Mode.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-5

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.2 COM OPERATION

COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION

NOTE:

During PA Mode, the COM MIC annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color is white, indicating that the COM transmitter is inactive.

The COM radio frequency box is composed of four fields consisting of two standby fields and two active fields. In the COM Frequency Box, the active frequencies are on the left side and the standby frequencies are on the right.

The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. A selected COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio Panel

(COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Keys). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (or that the PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).

Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.

During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission, audio from the other COM radio is muted.

Active

Fields

Standby

Fields

Top Section of the Audio Panel

Tuning Box

COM2 Radio is Selected on the Audio Panel

Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit

4-6


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS

During COM transmission, a white ‘TX’ appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency

Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC

Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.

During COM signal reception, a white ‘RX’ appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency

Transfer Arrow.

Annunciator

Flashes During

Transmission

Transmit and

Receive Indicators

Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications

STUCK MICROPHONE

If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.

The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel continues to flash as long as the PTT

Key remains stuck.

Figure 4-5 Stuck Microphone Alert

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-7

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING

The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the PFD and MFD.

Manually Tuning a COM Frequency:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box.

Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.

Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.

COM VOL/

SQ

Knob

Pressing the Frequency

Transfer

Key Transfers COM

Frequencies Between Active and Standby Frequency Boxes

Turn COM Knob to

Tune Frequency in

Tuning Box

Figure 4-6 COM Frequency Tuning

SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED

Pressing the small COM Knob transfers the frequency tuning box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.

Pressing the

COM Knob Switches

the Tuning Box From One COM

Radio to the Other

Figure 4-7 Switching COM Tuning Boxes

4-8


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

COM TUNING FAILURE

In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in the radio in which the tuning failure occurred.

Emergency Channel

Loaded Automatically

Figure 4-8 COM Tuning Failure

QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ

Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency

COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the active COM radio (the one with the transfer arrow).

In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.

Press for Two Seconds to

Load 121.500 MHz

Figure 4-9 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-9

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY

COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:

• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)

• WPT – Airport Information Page

• NRST – Nearest (ARTCC, FSS, WX) Frequencies

Page

• NRST – Nearest Airports Page

• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page

AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD

COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency

Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.

Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.

Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.

Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.


4-10

Selecting the

NRST

Softkey Opens the

Nearest Airports

Window

Figure 4-10 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Boxes by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key as illustrated in Figures 4-11 and 4-12.

Auto-tuning from the MFD:

1)

2)

3)

4)

From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the appropriate softkey.

Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.

Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.


Press the

ENT Key to

Load a Highlighted

Frequency into the COM

Standby Frequency Box

Turn the

FMS

Knob to Scroll

Through a List of Frequencies

Figure 4-11 Frequency Auto-tuning

Press

Frequency

Transfer Key to Load

Frequency into COM

Active Tuning Box

Selected Airport

Identifier and

Information

Figure 4-12 WPT – Airport Information Page

Runway

Information

Press

ENT Key to Load

Frequency into COM

Standby Field. Cursor then Advances to

Next Frequency.

Press

INFO Softkey for

AIRPORT, RUNWAYS, and FREQUENCIES

Windows

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-11

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces , NRST – Nearest Frequencies, and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys and the

FMS Knob.

Figure 4-13 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages

4-12


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FREQUENCY SPACING

The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25 kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33 kHz spacing

(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration.

COM channel spacing is set from the MFD on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.

8.33 kHz Channel

Spacing

Figure 4-14 8.33 kHz and 25 kHz Channel Spacing

25 kHz Channel

Spacing

Changing COM frequency channel spacing:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Select the AUX – System Setup Page.

Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.

Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.

Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.

Figure 4-15 AUX – System Setup Page

190-00592-01 Rev. A


Select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz

COM Frequency

Channel Spacing

4-13

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTOMATIC SQUELCH

Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic

Squelch is disabled, COM Audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.

Pressing the COM

VOL/SQ Knob Turns

Off Automatic

Squelch. Pressing

Again Restores

Automatic Squelch.

Figure 4-16 Overriding Automatic Squelch

VOLUME

COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.

Figure 4-17 COM Volume Level

COM Volume Level

Remains for Two

Seconds

4-14


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.3 NAV OPERATION

NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION

The NAV radio frequency box is composed of four fields consisting of two standby fields and two active fields.

In the NAV Frequency Box, the active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.

The NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD The active NAV frequency is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the active radio. Pressing the

CDI Softkey twice selects NAV2 as the active radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode.

Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.

While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.

The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:

• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either ‘VOR1’ or ‘LOC1’ is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.

• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either ‘VOR2’ or ‘LOC2’ is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.

• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.

Standby

Fields

Active

Fields

Tuning Box

The NAV Radio is

Selected by Pressing the

CDI Softkey

Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-15

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

The NAV radio is selected for listening by pressing the corresponding key on the Audio Panel. Pressing the

NAV1, NAV2, DME, or ADF Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.

Figure 4-19 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver

NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING

The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFD and MFD.

Manually Tuning a NAV Frequency:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.

Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.

Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.

Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.

Press

VOL/ID Knob to Turn

Morse Code On or Off

Pressing the

Frequency Transfer Key

Transfers NAV Frequencies Between

Active and Standby Frequency Fields

Turn

NAV Knob to

Tune Frequency in

Tuning Box

Figure 4-20 NAV Frequency Tuning

4-16


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED

Pressing the small NAV Knob transfers the frequency tuning box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.

Pressing the Small

NAV Knob

Switches the Tuning Box From One

NAV Radio to the Other

Figure 4-21 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes

VOR/LOC ID

When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ‘ID’ appears to the left of the active

NAV frequency.

In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the

Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV

Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small

NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.

The Morse Code Identifier for the GHM VOR is On

Figure 4-22 NAV Radio ID Indication

Station

Identifier

VOLUME

NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.

When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.

NAV Volume Level

Remains for Two

Seconds

Figure 4-23 NAV Volume Levels

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-17

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING THE NAV FREQUENCY

NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:

• WPT – Airport Information • NRST – Nearest VOR

• WPT – VOR Information

• NRST – Nearest Airports

• NRST – Nearest (WX, VOR) Frequencies

• NRST – Nearest Airspaces

The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.

Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Boxes by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key as illustrated in Figures 4-24 and 4-25.

Press the

ENT Key to

Load a Highlighted

Frequency into the NAV

Standby Frequency Box

Turn the

FMS

Knob to Scroll

Through a List of Frequencies

Figure 4-24 Frequency Auto-tuning

4-18

Figure 4-25 NRST – Nearest VOR Page


Press

FREQ Softkey

to Place Cursor on

Frequency

190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

While en route, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,

WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys and the FMS Knob.

Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and

NRST – Nearest Airports Pages

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-19

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION

NOTE:

The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.

NOTE:

When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation section for details.

NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.

When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred to a NAV frequency field as follows:

• If the current CDI source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active frequency field.

The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to standby.

• If the current CDI source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.

• If the current CDI source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.

4-20


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

MARKER BEACON RECEIVER

NOTE:

The marker beacon indicators operate independently of the marker beacon audio and cannot be turned off.

The Marker Beacon Receiver is used as part of the ILS. The Marker Beacon Receiver is always on and detects any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.

The receiver detects the three marker tones, outer, middle, and inner, and illuminates the marker beacon annunciations. The marker beacon annunciations are located to the left of the altimeter on the PFD.

OM MM IM

Outer Marker Indication Middle Marker Indication

Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Signal Annunciators on the PFD

Inner Marker Indication

Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys

The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; on, muted and deselected.

Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects the marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when marker beacon audio is selected.

During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the marker annunciators (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The

MKR/MUTE Key annunciator is on, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key annunciator is extinguished.

Pressing the HI SENS Key selects increased marker beacon signal sensitivity. The HI SENS function is used to receive an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an approach. Pressing the HI SENS Key again returns to low sensitivity operation.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-21

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

ADF/DME TUNING (OPTIONAL)

NOTE:

When another window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.

The G1000 System tunes the optional ADF receiver and DME transceiver. The ADF is tuned by entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may be labeled

ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)

The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.

The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:

• Active and standby ADF frequencies

• ADF receiver mode

• ADF receiver volume

• DME tuning mode

When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF frequency field.

Turning the large

FMS

Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,

ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and the ENT Key.

Active ADF Frequency Standby ADF Frequency

ADF

Mode

DME

Mode

ADF

Volume

Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window

4-22


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

ADF TUNING

ADF frequencies in the 190.0 kHz to 1799.5 kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of the

ADF/DME Tuning Window. The G1000 System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0 kHz.

Tuning an ADF frequency:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.

Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.

Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.

Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.

Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.

Turn the Small

FMS Knob to

Enter Data in the Standby ADF

Frequency Field

Press

ENT Key

to Complete

ADF Frequency

Entry

Turn the Large

FMS Knob

to Move the

Cursor to the

Next Character

Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies

Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to the previously entered frequency.

Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with

‘0000.0’.

Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:

1)

2)

Turn the large

FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.

Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.

Press

ENT

Key to

Transfer ADF

Frequencies

Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-23

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

SELECTING THE ADF RECEIVER MODE

The following modes can be selected:

• ANT (antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on the Audio Panel.

• ADF – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station. NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on the Audio Panel.

• BFO (Beat Frequency Oscillator) – Provides an audible tone when a frequency is received. This allows identification of the interrupted carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world. It also confirms receipt of the NDB signal.

Selecting an ADF receiver mode:

1)

2)

Turn the large

FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.

Turn the Small

FMS Knob

to Select the

Mode

Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode

ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level is set to 50%.

Adjusting ADF receiver volume:

1)

2)

Turn the large

FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.

Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.

Turn the Small

FMS

Knob to Select the

Volume

Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume

4-24


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

DME TUNING

NOTE:

When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning and the NAV1

,

NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.

The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.

DME

Modes

Figure 4-34 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes

The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:

• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.

• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.

• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV frequency.

Selecting DME transceiver pairing:

1)

2)

3)

Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.

Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.

Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-25

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER

The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.

Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:

• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)

• Surveillance identifier capability

• Flight ID reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the aircraft registration or a unique FLT ID (Flight Identification).

• Altitude reporting

• Airborne status determination

• Transponder capability reporting

• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements

• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.

The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.

The Hazard Avoidance section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.

TRANSPONDER SOFTKEY CONTROLS

Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and

Code Selection.

When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON, ALT, VFR,

CODE, IDENT, BACK.

When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,

BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.

Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK

Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.

Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the top-level softkeys.

After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.

4-26


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

ALERTS


MSG

Figure 4-35 Transponder Softkeys

Press the IDENT or BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION

Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).

The STBY, ON , and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.

Selecting a transponder mode:

1)

2)

Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.

Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.

GROUND MODE

Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The Transponder powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by pressing any one of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the Transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.

GND

Mode

Figure 4-36 Ground Mode

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-27

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)

NOTE:

In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.

Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the Transponder does not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields appear in green.

STBY Mode (White

Code Number and

Mode)

Figure 4-37 Standby Mode

MANUAL ON MODE

ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.

ON Mode

(No Altitude

Reporting)

Figure 4-38 ON Mode

ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)

Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.

If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the

Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure altitude information.

ALT Mode

(Mode C Altitude

Reporting)

Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode

4-28


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

REPLY STATUS

When the Transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white ‘R’ indication appears momentarily in the reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.

Reply to

Interrogation

Figure 4-40 Reply Indication

ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE

NOTE:

When entering a code, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit.

NOTE:

The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200.

A total of 4096 discrete identification codes can be selected with the Code Selection Softkeys.

Entering a transponder code:

1)

2)

3)

Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.

Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.

Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the transponder code becomes active.

Entering a Code

Figure 4-41 Entering a Code

The VFR code can be entered either manually, each digit at a time, or by selecting the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey. When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field of the Transponder Data Box.

Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-29

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

IDENT FUNCTION

NOTE:

In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.

Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends an ID indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes one transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s radar screen.

The IDENT Softkey appears in all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDENT indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.

When the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.

IDNT

Indication

Figure 4-42 IDENT Indication

4-30


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FLIGHT ID REPORTING

NOTE:

If the FLT ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin authorized service center for configuration.

When the flight crew must enter the Flight ID before flight operation, the number is entered in the Timer/

References Window. The flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight

ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.

Entering a flight ID:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.

Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor.

Turn the FMS Knob to enter the desired FLT ID.

Press the ENT Key to complete FLT ID entry.

If an error is made during FLT ID entry, pressing the CLR Key moves the cursor back one space for each press of the key. If an incorrect FLT ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct FLT ID using the same procedure.

Flight ID

PFD Entry

Figure 4-43 Timer/References Window, Entering FLT ID

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-31

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS

POWER-UP AND FAIL-SAFE OPERATION

POWER-UP

The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to those in use before the unit was last turned off.

FAIL-SAFE OPERATION

If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker.

MONO/STEREO HEADSETS

Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G1000.

Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.

If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only.

SPEAKER

All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker Audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic, altitude) are heard on the speaker always, even when the speaker is off.

Figure 4-44 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys

4-32


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

INTERCOM

The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot, copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft radios.

Figure 4-45 Intercom Controls

PILOT KEY

Annunciator

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

COPLT KEY

Annunciator

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Pilot Hears Copilot Hears Passenger Hears

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot, copilot, passengers, MUSIC 1

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot, copilot, passengers, MUSIC 1

Copilot, passengers,

MUSIC 1

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot; passengers, MUSIC 1

Copilot

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot, copilot, passengers,

MUSIC 2

Copilot, passengers,

MUSIC 2

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot, passengers,

MUSIC 2

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot, copilot

Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot, copilot

Passengers;

MUSIC 2

Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes

PILOT isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.

COPILOT isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected radios and communicate with each other.

When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected radios and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot but can communicate with each other.

When both the PILOT and the COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios and is able to communicate with everyone else.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-33

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH

The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.

The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume and squelch. The ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ annunciators at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by the ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ annunciator being illuminated.

The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting. When the MAN SQ

Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic-Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls only the volume.

(Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection.)

When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls both volume and squelch.

Automatic/Manual

Squelch

Pilot Volume or Manual

Squelch

Copilot/Passenger

Volume or

Manual Squelch

Volume

Annunciator

Figure 4-46 Volume/Squelch Control

Squelch

Annunciator

PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM

A passenger address system is provided by pressing the PA Key for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. A Push-to-talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA announcements.

When PA is selected on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while pressing the PTT.

4-34


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER

The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that plays up to 2.5 minutes of COM signal recording from the selected COM radio. Recorded COM Audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once the 2.5 minutes of recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.

The PLAY Key controls the play function. The PLAY Annunciator flashes, indicating when play is in progress.

The PLAY Annunciator turns off after the present memory block has finished playing.

Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block and then returns to normal operation.

Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.

Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.

Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.

Figure 4-47 Play Key

ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS

NOTE:

MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 inputs cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.

The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5 mm stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks.

The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input MUSIC 1. (See

Table 4-1).

MUSIC 1

MUSIC 1 can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT Annunciators are extinguished. MUSIC 1 can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-35

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

MUSIC 1 M

UTING

MUSIC 1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. MUSIC 1 is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft muting is the gradual return of MUSIC 1 to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC 1 volume to return to normal is between one-half and four seconds.

MUSIC 1 M

UTING

E

NABLE

/D

ISABLE

Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches MUSIC 1 muting on and off. When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two beeps indicate music muting is disabled.

MUSIC 2

MUSIC 2 can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.

DATA LINK RECEIVER XM RADIO SYSTEM

Audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously (optional: requires subscription to XM Audio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more details on the

Data Link Receiver.

Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks removes the Data Link Receiver Audio from that input. For example, if passengers prefer their own music while the pilot listens to the Data Link Receiver, the entertainment audio should be connected to the MUSIC 2 jack.

REVERSIONARY MODE

The red DISPLAY BACKUP button selects the reversionary mode for both displays. Reversionary mode operation displays flight and engine information on both the PFD and MFD, in case of display failure.

See the System Overview section for more information.

Figure 4-48 Reversionary Mode Button

4-36


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.6 PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE FOR THE GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL

NOTE:

If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob, verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at max volume setting. On single pilot flights verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the audio system.

NOTE:

When the MAN SQ Key is pressed the ICS squelch is now able to be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.

After powering up the G1000 System the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.

Automatic/Manual

Squelch

Pilot and

Copilot ICS

Isolation Keys

Pilot Volume or Manual

Squelch

Volume

Annunciator

Figure 4-49 Audio Panel Controls

Copilot/Passenger

Volume or

Manual Squelch

Squelch

Annunciator

Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.

Verify that the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished.

Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This will set the headset audio level to max volume (least amount of attenuation).

Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.

Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.

Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings to their liking, keeping in mind the notes above.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


4-37

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

B

LANK

P

AGE

4-38


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION

This section of the Pilot’s Guide provides GPS navigation operating procedures for the G1000 installed in the

Diamond DA40/40F aircraft. This section assumes some prior knowledge of the other sections of the G1000

Pilot’s Guide, especially the “how-to” of entering data and MFD Page Groups. All screenshots shown in this section are for reference only and are subject to change. This section is organized as follows:

• MFD Navigation Map • Nearest Airports

• PFD Inset Map and Windows

• Direct to Navigation

• Nearest NDBs

• Nearest VORs

• Airport Information

• Intersection Information

• Nearest Frequencies

• Nearest Airspaces

• NDB Information

• VOR Information

• User Waypoint Information

• Nearest User Waypoints

• Flight Planning

• Procedures

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-1

5.1 NAVIGATION MAP (MFD)

WARNING:

The Navigation Map is only intended to enhance situational awareness. Navigation is to be conducted using only current charts, data, and authorized navigation facilities.

This section describes the MFD Navigation Map Page setup and operation which in most cases will be a “onetime” operation since the setup can be customized to accommodate the individual needs of the pilot.

NAVIGATION MAP PAGE SETUP AND OPERATION

NOTE:

MFD Navigation Map operations involving the display of traffic, terrain, and weather data are described in the Hazard Awareness Section.

Range

Ring

Wind Direction and Speed

Map Orientation

Interstate Highway

TERRAIN

Nav Range

Ring

Navigation

Course Line

Military

Operations

Area (MOA)

Figure 5-1 Navigation Map Page

(Note: Not All Map Display Items Shown)

Towered

Serviced

Airport

Topo Scale

Obstacles

Terrain Scale

Map Range

Legend

Map

Declutter

Softkey

5-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

The Navigation Map Page (Figure 5-1) is the first page in the Map Page Group and provides the following

GPS Navigation display capability:

•Map display showing airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with names (labels)

• Map pointer information (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name and other pertinent information)

• Map zoom range legend

• Wind direction and speed

• Heading indication

• Aircraft icon representing present position

• Icons for enabled map features

• Track vector

• Topography scale

• Fuel range ring

• Topography data

Selecting the Navigation Map Page:

1)

2)

Select the Map Page Group.

Select the Navigation Map Page. The page group name and page title (of all pages) are displayed below the

Navigation Data Box: MAP – NAVIGATION MAP. In addition to turning the FMS Knob, the Navigation Map

Page can be selected from any page by pressing and momentarily holding the

CLR (DFLT MAP) Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-3

NAVIGATION MAP SETUP

NOTE:

Refer to the appendices for a full description and interpretation of aviation map data.

The map display can be customized using the ‘Map Setup’ option in the Navigation Map Page Menu (Figure

5-2). To display the menu, press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).

Navigation Map

Page Menu

Map Setup

Option

Figure 5-2 Navigation Map Page

Menu

There are four setup groups within the Map Setup option (Figure 5-3):

• Map

• Traffic (refer to the Hazard Awareness Section)

• Aviation

• Land

Figure 5-3 Map Setup Groups

5-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

M

AP

G

ROUP

Figure 5-4 Map Group

Orientation

There are four map orientation selections: North up, Track up, DTK up, and HDG up. The orientation default setting is ‘North Up’.

• North up fixes the top of the map to a north heading.

• Track up adjusts the top of the map display to the current ground track.

• Desired Track Up (DTK up) fixes the top of the map display to the desired course.

• Heading Up (HDG up) fixes the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.

Figure 5-5 Map Orientation Selections

Changing the map orientation:

1)

2)

3)

4)

With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

Select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field. Select the desired orientation and press the ENT Key.

Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-5

GPS NAVIGATION

Auto Zoom

The automatic zoom feature automatically adjusts the map range from 2000 nm through each lower range, stopping at 1.5 nm as the aircraft approaches the destination waypoint.

Enabling/disabling automatic zoom:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.


Select the ‘Map’ group.


Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.

Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.


Land Data

The Navigation Map can display background land data (roads, lakes, borders, etc). The background land data can also be removed from the display (turned off).

Enabling/disabling land data:

4)

4)

5)

6)

1)

2)

3)





Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.

Select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’.


5-6


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Track Vector

Track Vector

Figure 5-6 Track Vector

The Navigation Map can display a track vector as a dashed cyan line segment with an arrowhead attached to the end, extended to a predicted location in 60 seconds along the current aircraft track (Figure

5-6). The track vector is useful in minimizing track angle error.

Enabling/disabling the track vector:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)





Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.



190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-7

GPS NAVIGATION

Wind Vector

The wind vector is displayed in the upper right corner of the map and displays wind direction and speed (in knots). Wind direction is indicated by an arrow.

Wind Speed and Direction

Figure 5-7 Wind Vector

Enabling/disabling the wind vector:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)





Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.



5-8


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Nav Range Ring

The Nav Range Ring (Figure 5-8) shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range of the Nav Ring is determined by the map range: 125 feet (500 feet map range) to 500 nm (2000 nm map range).

Range Value

Nav Range

Ring

Figure 5-8 Nav Range Ring

Enabling/disabling the Nav Range Ring:

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

4)





Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.



190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-9

GPS NAVIGATION

Topo Data

Topographic data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map using the ‘TOPO DATA’ setting.

The topo data range is the maximum map range on which topo data is displayed.

TOPO Data

Shown on

Map

TOPO

Softkey

Figure 5-9 TOPO Data

Topo Scale

5-10


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Enabling/disabling topo data and select a topo data range:

4)

3)

4)

5)

1)

2)

3)

6)

7)

8)





Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.


Highlight the range field. TOPO ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.

To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.

Select the desired range.


Topo Scale

The topo scale setting enables or disables the topography range box located in the lower right corner of the Navigation Map.

Enabling/disabling the topo range box:

4)

5)

6)

1)

2)

3)



Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.

Highlight the ‘TOPO Range’ field.



190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-11

GPS NAVIGATION

Terrain Data

Terrain data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map Page using the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ setting. A data range can also be selected. The data range is the maximum map range that terrain data is displayed.

5-12

TERRAIN

Data Shown on Map

TERRAIN Scale

TERRAIN Softkey

Figure 5-10 TERRAIN Data

Enabling/disabling terrain data and to select a terrain data range:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.




Highlight the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ field.

8)

9)


Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field. TERRAIN ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.

To change the TERRAIN range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.

Select the desired range

10)


11)



190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Obstacle Data

Obstacles

Figure 5-11 Obstacle Data

Obstacle data can be enabled or disabled on the Navigation Map Page using the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’ setting. A data range can also be selected. The data range is the maximum map range that terrain data is displayed.

Enabling/disabling obstacle data and to select a terrain data range:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.




Highlight the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’ field.


Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field. OBSTACLE ranges are from Off to 50 nm.

To change the OBSTACLE range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.

8)

9)


10)


11)


190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-13

GPS NAVIGATION

Fuel Range Ring (Fuel RNG) (RSV)

The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the flight distance that the aircraft has remaining. A dashed green circle indicates the transition range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the range of all fuel, including the reserve fuel. If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.

Enabling/disabling the fuel range ring and select a fuel range time:

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

4)





8)

Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.


Highlight the fuel reserve time field. The time indicated is the time the aircraft can fly with remaining fuel on board.

To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45 minutes.

9)


10)


W

EATHER

G

ROUP

Refer to the Hazard Awareness Section for information pertaining to the setup and display of the Weather group options.

T

RAFFIC

G

ROUP

Refer to the Hazard Awareness Section for information pertaining to the setup and display of the Traffic group options.

5-14


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

A

VIATION

G

ROUP

Figure 5-12 Aviation Group

• Active Flight Plan (ACTIVE FPL)- The active flight plan zoom range sets the maximum range at which the active flight plan magenta line is shown on the display (off - 2000 nm).

• Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)- The active flight plan waypoint label size sets the size at which the active flight plan names appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The zoom range sets the maximum range at which active flight plan waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).

• Large, Medium, and Small Airports (LARGE APT, MEDIUM APT, SMALL APT) - The airport label size sets the size at which the large, medium, or small airport names size appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the airports appear on the display:

• Large: off - 500 nm

• Medium: off - 300 nm

• Small: off - 100 nm

• Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION) - The zoom range sets the maximum range at which runway extensions appear on the display:

• Off - 100 nm

• Intersection, Non-Directional Beacon, and VOR Waypoints (INT WAYPOINT, NDB WAYPOINT, VOR

WAYPOINT) - The INT, NDB, and VOR label size sets the maximum range at which the NAVAIDs names appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the NAVAIDs appear on the display:

• INT: off - 30 nm

• NDB: off - 30 nm

• VOR: off - 300 nm

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-15

GPS NAVIGATION

• Airspace Boundaries (CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/TCA, and CLASS D) - The airspace zoom range sets the maximum range at which the three classes of airspace appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the airspace boundaries appear on the display:

• CLASS B: off - 500 nm

• CLASS C: off - 500 nm

• CLASS D: off - 300 nm

• “Other” Airspace Boundaries (RESTRICTED, MOA (Military), OTHER AIRSPACE, and TFR (temporary flight restrictions). The other airspace boundary zoom range sets the maximum range at which restricted,

MOA, and other (training, caution, danger, warning, and alert areas) airspace boundaries are displayed

• RESTRICTED: off - 500 nm

• MOA (MILITARY): off - 500 nm

• OTHER AIRSPACE: off - 500 nm

• TFR: (only present when GDL 69 is installed): off - 2000 nm

Selecting an aviation group item text size:

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)



Select the ‘Aviation’ group.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.

Select the desired aviation option.

Select the desired text size.

Press the ENT Key to accept the selected text size.


Selecting an aviation group item range:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)



Select the ‘Aviation’ group.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.

Select the desired aviation option.

Select the desired range (RNG).

Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.


5-16


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

L

AND

G

ROUP

Figure 5-13 Land Group

• Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) - The LAT/LON label size sets the size at which latitude/longitude labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The zoom range sets the maximum range at which LAT/LON waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).

• Highways, Roads, and Railroads (FREEWAY, LOCAL HWY, LOCAL ROAD, RAILROAD) - The highway and road zoom range sets the maximum range at which highways, roads, and railroads appear on the display:

• FREEWAY: off - 800 nm

• NATIONAL HWY: off - 80 nm

• LOCAL HWY: off - 30 nm

• LOCAL ROAD: off - 15 nm

• RAILROAD: off - 30 nm

• Cities and Towns (LARGE CITY, MEDIUM CITY, SMALL CITY) - The cities and town label size sets the maximum range at which city and town names appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which cities and towns appear on the display:

• LARGE CITY (approximate populations greater than 200,000): off - 1500 nm

• MEDIUM CITY (approximate populations greater than 50,000): off - 200 nm

• SMALL CITY (approximate populations greater than 5,000): off - 50 nm

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-17

GPS NAVIGATION

• States and Provinces, Rivers and Lakes, and User Waypoints (STATE/PROV, RIVER/LAKE, USER

WAYPOINT) - the label range sets the maximum range at which the three categories appear on the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which the three categories appear on the display:

• STATE/PROV: off - 1500 nm

• RIVER/LAKE off - 500 nm

• USER WAYPOINT: off - 300 nm

Selecting a land group item text size:

5)

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)

4)



Select the ‘Land’ group.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.

Select the desired land option.

Select the desired text size.



Selecting a land group item range:

5)

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)

4)



Select the ‘Land’ group.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.

Select the desired Land option.




5-18


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

NAVIGATION MAP OPERATIONS

S

ELECTING A

M

AP

R

ANGE

Map Range

Indicator

Figure 5-14 Map Range Indicator

The Navigation Map can be set to 28 different range settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles. The current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the Navigation Map Page and represents the top-tobottom distance covered by the map. To change the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in, or clockwise to zoom out.

D

ECLUTTERING THE

M

AP

The Navigation Map can be quickly “decluttered” by repeatedly pressing the DCLTR Softkey until the desired detail is displayed. The declutter level label is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey. Note that during an instrument approach, automatic decluttering takes place. Table 5-1 lists the features that are turned off at each declutter level. Note that some of the map features are automatically removed at certain zoom ranges due to the map setup configuration for each map item. “SUA” listed in the following table stands for Special

Use Airspace. These are controlled airspaces, military zones, etc.

Map Features

Always Displayed

No Declutter Declutter (-1)

Flight Plan Route Lines All Map features visible River/Lakes Names Only

Flight Plan Route Wpts

Rivers/Lakes

Declutter (-2) Declutter (-3)

User Waypoints Large Airports

Land/Country Text Latitude/Longitude Grid Medium Airports

Large City VORs Small Airports

Topography Data

Terrain Proximity Data

Map Borders

Bearing Line

Medium City

Small City

Not Affected

Freeways

NDBs

Intersections

SUA Group 0

SUA Group 1

SUA Group 3

SUA Group 4

Runway Labels

Nexrad Data

Traffic Symbols

Traffic Labels

National Highways

Local Highways

Local Roads

Local Road Labels

Railroads

Major Political

Boundaries

Table 5-1 Map Declutter Levels

SUA Group 2

SUA Group 5

SUA Group 6

SUA Group 7

Obstacles

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-19

GPS NAVIGATION

M

AP

P

ANNING

Panned Location

Information

Panning

Location

5-20

Figure 5-15 Map Panning

Map panning (Figure 5-15) moves the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range.

When the panning function is selected by pushing in the Joystick, a map arrow flashes on the map display.

A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the arrow, the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position and the elevation of the land at the position of the arrow.

When the map arrow crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet (above Mean Seal Level, MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.

Panning the map:

1)

2)

Push in the Joystick to display the map arrow.

Move the Joystick in the general direction of the desired destination to place the arrow at the destination location. When the arrow is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was not originally displayed on the map). This feature applies to everything displayed on the map except route lines.

When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, features or objects are displayed in the box located at the top of the display. From here, the pilot can designate the waypoint as the direct-to destination.

When the arrow crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is displayed at the top of the display.

3)

Push in the Joystick to remove the arrow and return to the present position.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

D

ISPLAYING

T

OPOGRAPHIC

D

ATA ON THE

M

AP

On-screen map maximum

elevation

On-screen map minimum

elevation

Aircraft Altitude

Maximum

Minimum

Ground Elevation

Figure 5-16 Topography Range Display

The Navigation Map displays various shades of topography land colors representing the rise and fall of land elevation similar to aviation sectional charts (Figure 5-16). The Navigation Map can display a topographic range representing various key points of terrain elevation colors with their associated elevation value labeled.

Displaying topographic data on the Navigation Map:

1)

2)

3)

Press the MAP Softkey.

Press the TOPO Softkey. Topographic data can also be displayed on the Navigation Map by using the ‘On/Off’ topo data map setup feature. See the Navigation Map Page Setup Menu Section for more information.

Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topo data from the Navigation Map. When topo data is removed from the page, the Jeppesen Nav data is presented on a black background.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-21

GPS NAVIGATION

GPS N

AVIGATION

D

ATA

B

OX

Figure 5-17 GPS Navigation Data Box

The GPS Navigation Data Box (Figure 5-17) is displayed in the top center of the MFD and PFD. It displays four, user-configurable fields which can display the information listed below. Instructions on changing a data field are given in the System Overview section.

• Bearing to next waypoint (BRG)

• Distance to next waypoint (DIS)

• Desired track to next waypoint (DTK)

• Enroute safe altitude (ESA)

• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)

• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)

• Ground Speed (GS)

• Maximum Safe Altitude (MSA)

• Track angle error (TKE)

• Track angle (TRK)

• Vertical speed required (VSR)

• Cross track error (XTK)

• Currently selected MFD page title

5-22


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

M

EASURING

B

EARING AND

D

ISTANCE

Navigation Map

Page Menu

Measure

Bearing/Distance

Option

Figure 5-18 Measure Bearing/Distance Option

The second map setup option is ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ (Figure 5-18), which provides a quick and easy method for determining the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation Map.

Measuring bearing and distance between two points:

1)

2)

3)

Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).

Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.

Press the ENT Key. A reference arrow is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position and the window shown in Figure 5-19 is displayed.

4)

5)

Move the Joystick to place the reference arrow at the desired location. As the arrow is being moved, a dashed line is drawn from the reference (starting) point to its present position. The bearing and distance from the starting point is displayed along with the new coordinates. Elevation at the current position is also displayed

(Figure 5-19). Pressing the ENT Key changes the starting point for measuring.

To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push in the Joystick or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the page menu and press the ENT Key.

Obstacle Symbol

Controlled Airspace

Information

Distance and

Bearing to the

Selected Position

Elevation

Figure 5-19 Measure Bearing/Distance Box

Lat/Lon at

Selected Position

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-23

GPS NAVIGATION

5.2 PFD INSET MAP AND WINDOWS

GPS navigation operations on the Primary Flight Display centers around the use of the Inset Map and windows shown in the lower right corner of the screen (Figures 5-20 and 5-21).

INSET MAP

NOTE:

The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°, or when a 65° bank angle is reached.

Wind Direction and Speed

Map Orientation

Nav Range

Ring

Active

Navigation

Route

Figure 5-20 PFD Inset Map

(Note: Not All Features Shown)

Map Scale

The Inset Map is a smaller version of the MFD Navigation Map and is optionally displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD when the system is not in Reversionary Mode. The Inset Map is displayed by pressing the

INSET Softkey. Inset Map features are enabled on the MFD (refer to the Navigation Map Setup Section for details). Inset Map operations involving the display of traffic, terrain, and weather data are discussed in the

Hazard Awareness Section.

The Map Inset Pop-up window can display the following information:

• Moving map • Obstacles data

• Zoom scale legend • Indication of enabled map features

• Orientation

• Aircraft icon

• Topographic data

• Traffic data

• Weather data

• Terrain data

• Active navigation flight plan

• Track vector

• Wind direction/speed

• Latitude/longitude lines

• NAV range ring

• Fuel (reserve) range ring (enabled/disabled from the MFD)

5-24


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

PFD WINDOWS

PFD windows are displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. PFD windows can display different types of information, the discussion in this section of the pilot’s guide is limited to the following windows that pertain to GPS navigation:

• Nearest • Flight Plan • Timer/References

• Direct-to • Procedures

PFD

Window

Location

Figure 5-21 PFD Window Location

OPERATIONS

The following Inset Map operations can be performed independently of the MFD:

• Changing the zoom range • Changing the declutter level • Map panning

To change the Inset Map zoom range, turn the

Joystick

clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the range. Zoom ranges from 500 feet to 2,000 nautical miles. To change the declutter level, press the INSET

Softkey. Press the

DCLTR

Softkey to remove background map details until the desired amount of detail is displayed. The declutter level appears in the softkey label (i.e., DCLTR-1).

Panning the map:

1)

2)

3)

Push in the Joystick to display the Map Pointer. The map can now move beyond its current limits without adjusting the range.

Move the Joystick to pan the map in the general direction of the desired location. When the pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted for approximately 4 seconds (even if the name was not originally displayed on the map). This feature applies to everything displayed on the map except for route lines.

Push in the Joystick to cancel the panning function and return to the present position on the map.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-25

GPS NAVIGATION

5.3 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION (MFD)

NOTE:

The Direct-to Window Inset Map (Figure 5-22) range is adjustable. To change the map range, turn the

Joystick to the left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select a higher range.

The “direct-to” navigation feature provides a quick method of setting a GPS course to a destination waypoint.

Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is cancelled or replaced by a new destination.

Direct-To Waypoint

Identifier, Facility,

Symbol, City

Flight Plan

Waypoints

Inset Map Showing


Location

Bearing to Waypoint from Present Position

Bearing to Waypoint from Present Position

Course to Waypoint from Present Position

Figure 5-22 MFD Direct to Window

Nearest Waypoints

Direct to Waypoint

Location

Direct to Waypoint

Location

Activate Annunciation

Entering a Direct-to destination:

1)

Press the Direct-to Key.

2)

Enter the destination waypoint (identifier, facility, or city).

3)

Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.

4)

Press the ENT Key to highlight ‘Activate?’ or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘COURSE’ field.

5)

Enter the desired course to the waypoint.

6)

Press the ENT Key to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.

7)

Press the ENT Key again to activate the Direct-to.

5-26


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting a Direct-to destination to a flight plan waypoint:

1)

2)

While navigating an active flight plan, press the

Direct-to

Key.

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to the left to display a list of flight plan waypoints as shown in Figure 5-23.

FPL Waypoints

Figure 5-23 Flight Plan Waypoint List

3)

4)

5)

Select the desired waypoint.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

Press ENT again to activate a Direct-to.

Selecting a Direct-to destination to a nearest airport:

1)

2)


Turn the small

FMS

Knob to the left. Initially, a flight plan waypoint list is displayed as in Figure 5-24. The list is populated only when navigating a flight plan.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-27

GPS NAVIGATION

NRST Waypoints

Figure 5-24 Nearest Airport List

3)

4)

5)

6)

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to the right to display the ‘NRST’ airports to the aircraft’s current position as shown in

Figure 5-24.

Select the desired airport.

Press the

ENT

Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

Press

ENT

again to activate a Direct-to.

Re-centering the CDI to the destination waypoint:

Press the Direct-to Key, followed by pressing the

ENT

Key twice. If a missed approach point (MAP) is the current destination, the approach will be canceled.

Manually defining the active Direct-to:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)


Place the cursor in the ‘COURSE’ field.

Enter the desired course.

Press the

ENT

Key. The cursor now highlights ‘ACTIVATE?’.

Press the

ENT

Key again to begin navigation using the selected destination, altitude constraint, and course.

5-28


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Canceling Direct-to navigation:

1)

2)

3)

Press the

Direct-to

Key.

Press the

MENU

Key to display the Direct-to options menu (Figure 5-25).

With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the

ENT

Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.

Cancel Option

Figure 5-25 Canceling Direct-to Option

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-29

GPS NAVIGATION

DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION SHORTCUTS FROM THE MFD

A direct-to can be performed from any page displaying a single waypoint identifier (such as the Waypoint pages for airports and NAVAIDs) by simply pressing the Direct-to Key and the ENT Key. For pages that display a list of waypoints (e.g., the Nearest Airport Page), the desired waypoint must be highlighted with the cursor before pressing the Direct-to Key.

Direct-to destinations may also be selected from the Navigation Map Page by panning to the desired destination location, pressing the Direct-to Key, and then the ENT Key twice. If no airport, NAVAID or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically created at the location of the Map Pointer.

Bearing and

Distance to

Direct-to Waypoint

Direct-to Waypoint

Information

Panning Arrow

Figure 5-26 Direct-to Navigation Using Map Panning

Selecting a direct-to destination from the Navigation Map Page (Figure 5-26):

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

From the Navigation Map Page, press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.

Move the Joystick to place the Map Pointer at the desired destination location.

If the Map Pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.


Press the ENT Key twice to navigate to the waypoint.

If the Map Pointer is placed on an open location, press the Direct-to Key.

Press the ENT Key twice to create a ‘MAPWPT’ waypoint and then navigate to it.

5-30


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

5.4 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION (PFD)

NOTE:

Section 5.2 describes the PFD Inset Map and PFD Windows. It is recommended that the user read this section before beginning GPS navigation operations on the PFD.

Waypoint Symbol

Identifier

Facility Name

Flight Plan

Waypoint List

Bearing From Waypoint

Distance to

Direct-to

Waypoint

City, State

Nearest

Waypoint List

Lat/Lon of Direct-to

Waypoint

Activate

Annunciation

Course to Selected Waypoint

Figure 5-27 PFD Direct-to Window

Enter a Direct-to destination

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

Press the

Direct-to

Key.

Place the cursor in the desired selection field.

Begin selecting the desired identifier, location, etc.

Press the

ENT

Key. The cursor is now flashing on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

Press the

ENT

Key to activate.

Press the

ENT

Key to highlight ‘Activate?’ or turn the large

FMS

Knob to highlight the ‘COURSE’ field.

Enter the desired course to the waypoint.

Press the

ENT

Key to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.

Press the

ENT

again to activate the Direct-to.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-31

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting a Direct-to destination to a flight plan waypoint:

1)

2)

While navigating an active flight plan, press the

Direct-to

Key.

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to the left to display a list of flight plan waypoints as shown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Flight Plan Waypoint List

3)

4)

5)

Select the desired waypoint.

Press the

ENT


Press

ENT


Selecting a Direct-to destination to a nearest airport:

1)

2)

Press the

Direct-to

Key.

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to the left. Initially, a flight plan waypoint list is displayed as in Figure 5-29. The list is only populated when navigating a flight plan.

5-32

Figure 5-29 Nearest Airport List

3)

4)

5)


Press the

ENT


Press

ENT


Cancelling Direct-to navigation:

1)

2)

3)

Press the Direct-to Key.

Press the

MENU

Key to display the Options Window. The cursor will be flashing on ‘Cancel Direct-to NAV’.

Press the

ENT

Key to cancel the Direct-to.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

5.5 AIRPORT INFORMATION

Identifier

Airport Location

Region

UTC Time Zone

Information

Airport Displayed on Map

Airport

Information Page

Softkeys

Figure 5-30 Airport Information Page

Selecting the Airport Information Page (Figure 5-30):

1)

2)

Select the ‘WPT’ page group.

Select the first rectangular page icon.

Selecting an airport by identifier, facility name, or city location:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Select the identifier, facility name or city location field.

Enter the desired identifier, facility name, or city location.

Press t he

ENT Key.

To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob .

Airport Symbol

Airport Type

Facility Name

Elevation at

Airport

Fuel Type

Available

Position

Runway

Information

Communication and Navigation

Frequencies

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-33

GPS NAVIGATION

DUPLICATE WAYPOINTS

As an identifier, facility name or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier, a duplicate waypoint appears once you select the identifier (Figure 5-31).

Figure 5-31 Duplicate Waypoints

Loading a frequency in the standby COM or NAV field:

1)

2)

With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS

Move the cursor to the Frequencies Box.

Knob

to activate the cursor.

3)

•

•

•

•

Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list, placing the cursor on the desired frequency. If a listed frequency has additional information for the pilot to view, the frequency is preceded by an info (‘i’) designation. Press the

ENT Key to view the information. The following may be displayed with the frequency:

‘TX’ – transmit only

‘RX’ – receive only

‘PT’ – part time frequency

‘i’ – additional information exists, press the ENT Key

4)

5)

Press the ENT Key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or NAV Frequency Box.

Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

5-34


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

The Airport Frequencies field uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in Table 5-2:

Communication

Frequencies Which

May Include Additional

Information

Approach

Arrival

Class B

Class C

CAT

Departure

TMA

Terminal

TRSA

Communication Frequencies

Without Additional

Information

ATIS

ASOS

AWOS

Center

Clearance

Gate

Control

Ground

Helicopter

Multicom

Pre-Taxi

Radar

Ramp

Other

Tower

Unicom

Table 5-2 Frequency Descriptions and Abbreviations

Navigation

Frequencies

ILS

LOC

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 5-32 Viewing a Restriction


5-35

GPS NAVIGATION

Loading a pilot control lighting frequency into selected COM standby frequency:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Knob


Move the cursor to the ‘PCL FREQ’ field in the ‘Runways’ box.

Press the ENT Key to place the PCL frequency in the standby field of the COM Frequency Box.


ADDITIONAL AIRPORT RUNWAY INFORMATION

Runway Designation

Runway Surface

Runway Size

Runway Lighting

Figure 5-33 Runway Information Box

The airport runway information field (Figure 5-33) displays runway designations, length, surface type and lighting for the selected airport. A map image of the runway layout and surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport Information Window. The map image range is displayed in the lower left corner and is adjustable using the Joystick. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available.

Displaying information for each additional runway:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)


Place the cursor on the runway designation field.

Turn the small FMS Knob to display the next runways for the selected airport.

Select the desired runway.

Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Turn the Joystick counterclockwise to select a lower range and rotate it clockwise to select a higher range.

The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the airport runway information box:

• Type – Usage type: Public, Military, or Private

• Surface – Runway surface types include: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water

• Lighting – Runway lighting types include: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or Frequency (for pilot-controlled lighting)

5-36


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting a runway:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Knob


Place the cursor on the ‘RUNWAYS’ identifier field.

Turn the small

FMS Knob to display the next runway for the selected airport. Continue turning the small FMS

Knob to select the desired runway.

To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob .

Viewing a recent airport list:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

Select any Airport Information Page.


Highlight ‘View Recent Airport’.

Press the ENT Key. A list containing the most recent 16 airports is displayed.

Select an airport.

Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information page for the selected airport is displayed.

Viewing information:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the Departure, Arrival, or Approach Information Window.


Highlight ‘View Info’.

Press the ENT Key. The Airport Information Window is displayed.

Creating user waypoints via the Airport Information Page Map:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

With the Airport Information Page displayed, push the

Joystick

to activate the panning function. The target pointer is displayed at the center of the map.

After placing the pointer at the desired position, press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is now displayed with the captured position.

Enter a waypoint name.

Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.

If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.

Press the ENT Key to accept.


190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-37

GPS NAVIGATION

5.6 INTERSECTION INFORMATION

NOTE:

The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection.

Selecting the Intersection Information Page (Figure 5-34):

1)

2)

Select the WPT page group.

Select the second rectangular page icon. To change the map range, turn the Joystick to the left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select a higher range. Intersections can only be selected by identifier.

Intersection Identifier

Intersection

Displayed on Map

Intersection Symbol

Facility Name

Intersection Region and Position

Nearest VOR

Identifier,

Symbol, Radial and Distance

Figure 5-34 Intersection Information Page

5-38


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting an intersection:

1)

2)

3)

4)

With the Intersection Information Page displayed, press the FMS

Knob


Enter a name for the identifier.

Press t he

ENT Key.


Viewing a recent intersections list:

1)

2)

3)

With the Intersection Information Page displayed, press the

MENU Key.

Select an Intersection from the list (16 maximum are listed).

Press the ENT

K

ey to view the selected Intersection.

List of Recent

Intersections

Figure 5-35 Recent Intersection List

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-39

GPS NAVIGATION

5.7 NDB INFORMATION

Selecting the NDB Information Page (Figure 5-36):

1)

2)


Select the third rectangular page icon.

NDB Identifier

NDB Symbol

Displayed on Map

Figure 5-36 NDB Information Page

Selecting a specific NDB:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

With the NDB Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Highlight the desired selection field (identifier, name or closest city).

Enter an identifier, name or city.

Press t he

ENT Key.


NDB Symbol

NDB Name

Nearest City

NDB Region and

Position

NDB Frequency

Nearest Airport

Identifier,

Symbol, Radial and Distance

5-40


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

If duplicate identifiers occur, a duplicate waypoints menu is displayed, from which the desired waypoint can be selected. When scrolling through the closest cites list to select an NDB, a city may appear more than once, depending on the number of NDBs near it.

The following option is available by pressing the MENU Key (with the NDB Information Page displayed):

• ‘View Recent NDB List’ which displays the most recent NDB list.

Viewing the most recent NDB list:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the NDB Information Page and press the MENU Key. ‘View Recent NDB List’ is highlighted.


Select an NDB from the list (16 maximum are listed).

Press the ENT Key. The selected NDB is now the active NDB.

List of Recent

NDBs

Figure 5-37 Recent NDB List

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-41

GPS NAVIGATION

5.8 VOR INFORMATION

Selecting the VOR Information Page (Figure 5-38):

1)

2)


Select the fourth rectangular page icon.

Identifier

Nearest City

VOR Symbol

Displayed on Map

VOR Symbol

VOR Name

Magnetic Variation at

VOR location

General Location

Latitude/Longitude

Frequency

Nearest Airport; identifier, symbol, bearing, distance

Figure 5-38 VOR Information Page

Selecting a VOR:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

With the VOR Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Highlight the desired selection field (identifier, name or closest city).

Enter an identifier, name or city.

Press t he

ENT Key.


5-42


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

The following options are available by pressing the MENU Key (with the VOR Information Page displayed):

• ‘View Recent VOR List’ which displays the most recent VOR list.

Viewing the most recent VOR list:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Select the VOR Information Page.

Press the MENU Key. ‘View Recent VOR List’ is highlighted.


Select a VOR from the list (16 maximum are listed).

Press the ENT Key. The selected VOR is now the active user VOR.

List of Recent

VORs

Figure 5-39 Recent VOR List

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-43

GPS NAVIGATION

5.9 USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION

Selecting the User WPT Information Page (Figure 5-40):

1)

2)


Select the fifth rectangular page icon.

User Waypoint

Name and Symbol

5-44

Map of Surrounding

Area/User Waypoint

Location and Symbol

Comment

Information

Reference Waypoints

User Waypoint List

Number of

Waypoint Slots

Used/Avaialble

Rename Softkey

Figure 5-40 User WPT Information Page

C

REATING

U

SER

W

AYPOINTS

User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint Information Page or the Navigation Map Page.

To create a new user waypoint from the User Waypoint Information Page, enter the name (identifier) and position, or reference another waypoint by radial and distance.

Creating a new user waypoint:

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Enter a name for the new waypoint.

Press t he

ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.

With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

Highlight the latitude/longitude field or the Reference Waypoints field, depending on how the waypoint is to be defined.

Enter the position coordinates or the radial and distance from the reference waypoint.

Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.

Press the FMS

Knob

to remove the flashing cursor.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Modifying a user waypoint:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS

Knob


Move the cursor to the desired field.

Turn the small

FMS Knob to make changes.

Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.


Deleting a user waypoint:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Select the User Waypoint Information Page.

Press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Information Page options or press the

DELETE

Softkey.

Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.

Press t he

ENT Key. The message ‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is displayed.

With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

Deleting all user waypoints:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)



Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation windows is displayed.

Press the ENT Key to accept ‘YES’ or highlight ‘NO’.


‘View Recent User WPT List’ displays the most recent user waypoint list.

Viewing the most recent user waypoint list:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)


Press the MENU Key to display the User Waypoint Information Page MENU.

Select ‘View Recent User WPT List’.

Press the ENT Key. Select a waypoint from the list (16 maximum are listed).

Press the ENT Key. The selected waypoint is now the active user waypoint.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-45

GPS NAVIGATION

‘Present Position’, when selected, will move the currently selected user waypoint to the present position of the aircraft. The user waypoint is set to the airplane’s position at the time when the option was selected.

Moving the currently selected user waypoint to the present position of the aircraft:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the User Waypoint Information Page and press the MENU Key.

Select ‘Use Present Position’.


Highlight the position and press the ENT Key.

‘Auto Comment’, when selected, will overwrite the currently selected user waypoint comment with an automatically generated comment. Auto comments are in the same format as comments that are generated for user waypoints that have not specified unique user waypoint comments. The auto comment can be one of three styles:

• REF1BRG1 / DIS1 - if the user waypoint position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and distance

(this is generally the default case, but the default case could also be the blank case if there are no reference waypoints near the user waypoints position.

• REF1BRG1 / REF2BRG2 - if the user waypoint position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and a reference 2 waypoint radial

• BLANK - if no reference waypoints are near the user waypoints position

Overwriting the currently selected user waypoint’s comment with an automatically generated comment:

1)

2)

3)

Select the desired waypoint on the User Waypoint Information Page.

Press the MENU Key. Select ‘Auto Comment’.


‘Create New Waypoint’ creates a new user waypoint and ‘Delete User Waypoint’ deletes a user waypoint.

Deleting a user waypoint:

1)

2)

3)


Press the MENU Key (select ‘Delete User Waypoint’ and press the ENT Key) or press the DELETE Softkey.

The message ‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is displayed. Select ‘YES’ to delete the waypoint.

‘Rename User Waypoint’ renames a user waypoint.

5-46


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Renaming a user waypoint:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)


Press the MENU Key (select ‘Rename User Waypoint’ and press the ENT Key) or press the RENAME Softkey.

The user waypoint field is highlighted. Rename the user waypoint.


The message ‘Would you like to rename the user waypoint’ is displayed. Select ‘YES’ to rename the new user waypoint.

Creating user waypoints from the Navigation Map Page:

1)

2)

3)

With the Navigation Map Page displayed, push the

Joystick

to activate the panning function. The map arrow is displayed at the present aircraft position.

After placing the map arrow at the desired position, press the

ENT

Key.

If the Map Pointer is placed on an airspace boundary, the options menu is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’ and press the

ENT Key.

Map Pointer

Information

Create User

Waypoint Option

Figure 5-41 User Waypoints on Navigation Map

4)

If ‘Review Airspaces is selected, the Review Airspace Information Box is displayed (Figure 5-43).

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-47

GPS NAVIGATION

User Waypoint

Name

Figure 5-42 Naming a User Waypoint

5)

If ‘Create User Waypoint’ is selected, the User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.

Airspace

Information

Figure 5-43 Airspace Information Box

6)

7)

8)

9)

Enter a waypoint name.

Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint field is highlighted.

If desired, enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and the radial and distance to the reference waypoint.

Press the ENT Key to accept.

10)


5-48


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

5.10 NEAREST AIRPORTS

Selecting the Nearest Airports Page (Figure 5-44):

1)

2)

Select the ‘NRST’ page group.


Airport Identifier, Symbol, Bearing to the Airport from Current Position, and

Distance (up to 25 airports within 200 nm of the current position)

NOTE: If there are no Nearest Airports available, a text “NONE WITHIN

200NM” is displayed.

Selected Nearest

Airport

Displayed on Map

Airport Name,

Closest City, Elevation

Length of Longest

Hard Surface

Runway (or soft surface, if no hard surface runway exists)

Primary

Communications

Frequency and Type

Most Precise Approaches

Available List

Figure 5-44 Nearest Airports Page

Selecting a nearest airport:

1) With the Nearest Airport Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

2) Turn the

FMS Knob to select the desired nearest airport.

Accessing information for a specific airport:

1)

2)

3)

4)

With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the APT Softkey or the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the

‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ field. The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted.

Press the FMS Knob.

Highlight the desired airport.


190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-49

GPS NAVIGATION

Accessing runway information for the selected airport:

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ field.



Quickly tuning the COM transceiver to a nearby airport frequency:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘FREQUENCIES’ field.

Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired frequency.

Press the ENT Key. The selected frequency is placed in the COM standby frequency tuning box.

Press the

F

requency Transfer Key to place the frequency in the active field.


Accessing information for a specific airport:

1)

2)

3)

4)

With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

Select the option ‘Select Airport Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ field.

Highlight the desired airport.


Figure 5-45 Nearest Airport Page

Menu

5-50


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Accessing runway information for the selected airport:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Select the option ‘Select Runway Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ field.



Quickly tuning the COM transceiver to a nearby airport frequency:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)


Select the option ‘Select Frequency Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘FREQUENCIES’ field.

Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired frequency.

Press the ENT Key. The selected frequency is placed in the COM standby frequency tuning box.

Press the

Frequency Transfer

Key to place the frequency in the active field.


190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-51

GPS NAVIGATION

5.11 NEAREST AIRPORTS (PFD)

The Nearest Airports Window on the PFD displays the 25 nearest airports along with the information shown in Figure 5-46:

Airport Symbol

Identifier

Primary Com

Frequency

Bearing

To Nearest

Airport

Distance From

Nearest Airport

Best Approach

Available

Length of Longest Hard

Surface Runway

(or soft surface if no hard runway exists)

Figure 5-46 Nearest Airports Window

OPERATIONS

The Nearest Airports Window is enabled and disabled by pressing the NRST Softkey. From the Nearest Airports

Window, information for a selected airport can be viewed, the active primary communications frequency can be selected, and direct-to navigation can be activated.

Airport Identifier

Facility Name

Airport Usage Type (e.g. public, private, military, heliport)

Region

Position Field

Airport Symbol

City, State

Elevation

Fuel Types Available (AV

Gas, Jet)

UTC Time

Figure 5-47 Airport Information Window

5-52


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Viewing information about an airport:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Press the NRST Softkey to display a list of the nearest airports.



The airport information is displayed with ‘BACK’ highlighted at the bottom of the window (Figure 5-48).

When finished viewing the airport information, press the ENT Key to return to the nearest airports list.

Activating a direct-to:

1)

2)

From the Nearest Airports Window, highlight the desired airport, then press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to

Window appears.

Pr ess the

ENT

Key twice to activate.

Airport Identifier

Airport Symbol

Facility Name

City, State

Flight Plan List

Bearing to

Direct-to

Waypoint

Course Field

NRST Airport List

Distance to

Direct-to

Waypoint

Figure 5-48 Airport Information Window

Selecting a COM frequency:

From the Nearest Airports Window, highlight the desired frequency, then press the

ENT

Key. The frequency is placed in the standby COM frequency field in the COM Tuning Box.

COM Frequency

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 5-49 COM Frequency


5-53

GPS NAVIGATION

5.12 NEAREST INTERSECTIONS

Selecting the Nearest Intersections Page (Figure 5-50):

1)

2)

Select the NRST page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page group icon located in the lower right corner of the display.

Select the Nearest Intersections Page, the second page in the group.

Intersection

Identifier, Symbol,

Bearing, Distance

(within 200 nm of current position)

Nearest

Intersection

Symbol

Latitude and

Longitude

Reference VOR

Name,

Symbol, Frequency,

Bearing, Distance

Figure 5-50 Nearest Intersections Page

Selecting a nearest intersection from the Nearest Intersections Page:

1)

2)


Select the desired intersection. The information on the Nearest intersection Page pertains to the selected intersection.

5-54


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

5.13 NEAREST NDB

Selecting the Nearest NDB Page (Figure 5-51):

1)

2)

Select the NRST page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page group icon located in the lower right corner of the display.

Select the Nearest NDB Page, the third page in the group.

Intersection

Identifier, Symbol,

Bearing, Distance

(within 200 nm of current position)

Nearest

NDB Map

Symbology

NDB Name

NDB Location

Latitude and

Longitude

Frequency

Figure 5-51 Nearest NDB Page

Selecting an NDB from the Nearest NDB Page:

1)

2)


Select the desired NDB. The information on the Nearest NDB Page pertains to the selected NDB.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-55

GPS NAVIGATION

5.14 NEAREST VOR

Figure 5-52 Nearest VOR Page

Selecting a nearest VOR:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the Nearest VOR Page (‘NRST’ page group, fourth rectangular page icon, Figure 5-52).


Turn the FMS Knob (or press the VOR Softkey) to select a VOR (Figure 5-53). Information and frequency corresponding to the selected VOR is displayed (Figures 5-54 and 5-55).


VOR Identifier,

Symbol, Bearing,

Distance (within

200 nm of current position)

Scroll Bar

Figure 5-53 Selecting a Nearest VOR

5-56


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Reference VOR

Name

VOR Type

Position

Figure 5-54 Information Corresponding to the Selected VOR

Closest City

Mag Variation

Figure 5-55 Frequency Corresponding to the Selected VOR

Selecting a nearest VOR using the options MENU:

1)

2)

3)

4)

With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

Select the option ‘Select VOR Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST VOR’ field.

Highlight the desired VOR.


Figure 5-56 Nearest VOR Page Menu

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-57

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting a VOR frequency using the options menu:

1)

2)

3)

4)

With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

Select the option ‘Select Frequency Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘FREQUENCY’ field.

Select the desired frequency.


Selecting and loading a VOR frequency:

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FREQ Softkey to highlight the VOR frequency in the ‘FREQUENCY’ field.

Press the ENT Key. The selected VOR frequency is placed in the NAV standby frequency box. Press the Frequency

Transfer Key to place the VOR frequency in the active NAV field (Figure 5-57).


Figure 5-57 Loading a VOR Frequency

5-58


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

5.15 NEAREST FREQUENCIES

Selecting the Nearest Frequencies Page (Figure 5-58):

1)

2)


Select the sixth rectangular page icon.

Nearest

ARTCC

Nearest FSS

Frequencies

Nearest WX

Frequencies

Nearest

Frequencies Map

Display

Figure 5-58 Nearest Frequencies Page

The Nearest Frequencies Page (Figure 5-58) displays a list of nearest ARTCC, FSS, and weather frequencies.

Only one ARTCC in the list is viewable at any given time and the user is able to change the currently viewed

ARTCC. For each ARTCC the bearing, distance, and relevant frequencies are displayed. If there are more than two frequencies for any ARTCC then they are displayed inside of a scrollable list box with only two visible at any given time.

A list of nearest FSSs is displayed with only one FSS in the list viewable at any given time and the user is able to change the currently viewed FSS. For each FSS the bearing, distance, and relevant frequencies are displayed.

If there is a NAV frequency for the given FSS then it is displayed in the list with its corresponding identifier so as to differentiate it from COM frequencies. If there are more than two frequencies of any type for a certain FSS then they are displayed inside of a scrollable list box with only two visible at any given time.

A list of nearest weather stations is displayed in a scrollable list box with a maximum of eight stations viewable at any time. Each line displays the call letters, type, and frequency of the given weather station.

A map of the currently selected item (ARTCC, FSS or weather station) and surrounding data, is displayed with a line between it and the current position. If there is no database loaded or if there are no stations in range, then any or all of the lists may be empty with the display indicating as such.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-59

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting a nearest ARTCC and frequency:

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest Frequencies Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest ARTCC.

Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired ARTCC frequency.

4)

Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the COM frequency standby field.

OR

:

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, press the ARTCC Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘NEAREST ARTCC’ box.



3)

4)

5)

4)


OR

:

1)

With the Nearest Frequencies Page displayed, press the MENU Key (Figure 5-55).

2)

Select the option ‘Select ARTCC Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST ARTCC’ field.




Figure 5-59 Nearest Frequencies Page Menu

5-60


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting a nearest FSS and frequency:

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, press the FSS Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘NEAREST FSS’ box.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest FSS.

Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired FSS frequency.

4)


OR :

1)

2)

With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

Select the option ‘Select FSS Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST FSS window.

3

) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired nearest FSS.

4) Turn the large

FMS Knob to select the desired FSS frequency.

5)

Press the ENT Key to load the FSS frequency into the COM frequency standby field.

Selecting a nearest weather frequency:

1)

With the Nearest Frequencies Page displayed, press the WX Softkey to highlight the frequency in the ‘WX

FREQUENCY’ field.

2)

3)

Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired weather frequency.

Press the ENT Key. The selected weather frequency is placed in the COM standby frequency box.

4)


OR

:

1)

2)

With the Nearest ARTCC Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

Select the option ‘Select WX Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST WX window.

3

) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired nearest WX frequency.

4

)

Press the ENT Key to load the WX frequency into the COM frequency standby field.

5)

Press the FMS

Knob

to remove the flashing cursor.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-61

GPS NAVIGATION

5.16 NEAREST AIRSPACES

The G1000 alerts the pilot to as many as nine controlled or special use airspaces (three at the most at one time) near or in the flight path. The airspace name, class, controlling agency, vertical limits and associated frequencies are displayed for the selected airspace.

Softkeys and page menu options can be used to switch between the lists in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box and the

‘Frequencies’ Box. Only one list is selectable at a time. The ALERTS Softkey is always displayed; if pressed, the

‘Airspace Alerts’ Box is selected for scrolling.

Airspace Alerts

Note: At most, three airspace alerts are shown at any given time

Airspace Type and Controlling

Agency

The Ceiling and

Floor Altitudes

(vertical limits)

Associated

Frequencies for the currently selected Airspace

Alert

Figure 5-60 Nearest Airspaces Window

Selecting and viewing an Airspace Alert with its associated information:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the Nearest Airspace Page (the seventh page in the Nearest (NRST) Page Group).

Press the ALERTS Softkey to place the cursor in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box (Figure 5-60).

Select the desired airspace.


5-62


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

1)

2)

3)

4)

OR :

With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

Highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.


5)


OR :

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest Airspace Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’

Box.


Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

GENERAL NOTES ON AIRSPACE ALERTS

Once an airspace alert has been selected, associated information concerning the specific airspace is provided. The information includes Airspace Name, Status, and Time to Entry. The status and time to entry

(if applicable) are based on the following conditions:

• If the projected course will take the aircraft inside an airspace within the next ten minutes, the status field shows the airspace as ‘Ahead’.

• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will take the aircraft inside, the status field shows the airspace as ‘Ahead < 2 nm’.

• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an airspace and the current course will not take the aircraft inside, the status field shows ‘Within 2 nm’.

• If the aircraft has entered an airspace, the status field shows ‘Inside’.

The airspace alerts are based on three-dimensional data (latitude, longitude, and altitude) to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectored to provide complete information on any nearby airspace. Once the described conditions exists, the status and time of entry is shown if the airspace alert messages are enabled on the System Setup Page (Auxiliary Page Group; see the System Overview Section).

At most three airspace alerts are displayed at any given time. The user can change the airspace alerts that are currently visible. For each airspace alert the name of the airspace, the proximity status (Inside, Ahead <

2nm, Ahead, Within 2nm), and the time until the current path of the aircraft will intercept the airspace (only when the airspace is Ahead, or Ahead < 2nm, otherwise “__:__:__” is used) is displayed. If there are more than three airspace alerts they are displayed in a scrollable list box with only three visible at one time.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-63

GPS NAVIGATION

AIRSPACE TYPE AND CONTROLLING AGENCY

NOTE:

All airspace alerts, except for prohibited areas, may be turned on or off from the System Setup Page.

An altitude buffer is also provided on the System Setup Page to provide an extra margin of safety above/ below the published limits. See the System Overview Section for additional details.

The Airspace Agency Box displays the following information for the selected airspace alert:

• ICAO control area

• Class B (FAA TCA)

• Mode C tower area

• Class B airspaces

• Class C airspaces

• Class D airspaces

• MOA airspaces

• Alert area

• Caution area

• Danger area

• Prohibited area

• Restricted area

• Training area

• Unknown area

• Warning area

• Class C, ICAO terminal control area, Terminal radar service area (TRSA), Mode C area, and

Military operations area (MOA)

• Class C, ICAO control area, ICAO terminal control area, Class B (FAA TCA), Terminal radar service area, and Mode C area

• Mode C tower area

• Military operations area (MOA), Warning area,

Alert area, Caution area, Danger area, Prohibited area, Restricted area, Training area, and Unknown area

The Vertical Limits Box displays the floor and ceiling limits of the airspace alert. The following are examples of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace:

• 5,000 ft MSL (5,000 feet mean sea level)

• 5,000 ft AGL (5,000 feet above ground level)

• MSL (at mean sea level)

• Notam (see Notice to Airmen)

• Unknown

• Unlimited

• See Chart

• Surface

5-64


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Selecting and quickly tuning an associated frequency for the currently selected airspace alert:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.

Press the FREQ Softkey.




OR:

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.


Highlight ‘Select Frequency Window’.





GENERAL NOTES ON ASSOCIATED FREQUENCIES

For each frequency the frequency type (ATIS, Ground, Tower, ILS, etc.) and the frequency are displayed on the same list row. For a frequency which has a “frequency information page”, an “i” symbol is displayed on the list row between the frequency type and the frequency. If there are more than three frequencies for an airport waypoint index then they are displayed in a scrollable list box with only three visible at a time.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-65

GPS NAVIGATION

5.17 NEAREST USER WAYPOINT

Selecting the Nearest User Waypoint Page (Figure 5-61):

1)

2)



Nearest User

Waypoint

Name, Symbol,

Bearing,

Distance

User Waypoint

Displayed on Map

User Waypoint

Information

Reference

Waypoints

Figure 5-61 Nearest User Waypoint Page

The Nearest User Waypoint Page (Figure 5-61) displays a list of up to the 25 nearest user waypoints that are within 200 nm. Each list item includes the identifier, icon, bearing and distance to the user waypoint from the current position. An arrow before the identifier indicates the selected user waypoint.

5-66


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Up to eleven user waypoints are visible at a time. If more than 11 are available, there is an indication that the list can be scrolled down and/or up. If there are less than 11, the unused area matches the background color and the scroll bar is not be visible. If there are no user waypoints in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest user waypoints is displayed.

Information about the selected user waypoint includes the user comment and location (latitude and longitude).

If there are no user waypoints, the user comment is blank and the position data is dashed.

Reference Waypoints for the selected user waypoint are those specified when the user waypoint was created.

If there is only one valid reference waypoint, the bearing and distance from the reference waypoint is stated and the second reference waypoint information is dashed. If there are no user waypoints or no valid reference waypoints, the reference waypoint fields are dashed.

If there are two valid reference waypoints, the bearings from the reference waypoints are stated and the first reference waypoint’s distance field is dashed.

A map of the currently selected user waypoint and surrounding data is displayed which at a minimum shows the selected user waypoint and the current aircraft position. A line is drawn between the current position and the selected user waypoint.

Selecting a nearest user waypoint:

1)

2)

3)

With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

If any previously entered User Waypoints are within 200 nm, these will be displayed with the closest listed first.

Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired waypoint. The remaining information on the Nearest User Waypoint

Page pertains to the selected Nearest User Waypoint.


190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-67

GPS NAVIGATION

5.18 FLIGHT PLANNING

The G1000 can store up to 99 numbered flight plans. Each of the stored flight plans can be used in reverse and each one can contain up to 31 waypoints.

FLIGHT PLANNING FROM THE MFD

CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN

There are 3 methods that can be used to create a flight plan:

• Entering an identifier, facility, or city name

• Map panning

• Menu option

Creating a flight plan by entering an identifier, facility name, or city name:

1)

Select the Flight Plan Catalog Page (Figure 5-62).

NEW Softkey

2nd Flight Plan

Page

Figure 5-62 Flight Plan Catalog Page

2)

Press the NEW Softkey. The Stored Flight Plan Catalog Page is displayed with a blank field for the first empty storage location (Figure 5-63).

5-68


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

First Empty

Storage

Location

Figure 5-63 Stored Flight Plan Page

3)

As the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint is being entered, the Waypoint Information

Window is displayed (Figure 5-64).

Stored Flight Plan

Page

Entering an

Identifier

Figure 5-64 Stored Flight Plan Page With Waypoint Identifier Window

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-69

GPS NAVIGATION

4)

5)

6)


Enter the identifier, facility name, or city name for each additional flight plan waypoint.

Once all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to store the flight plan and return to the Flight Plan

Catalog Page.

OR

:

1)

2)

Press the FPL Key.

Select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

3)

4)


Highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’ (Figure 5-65).

5-70

Figure 5-65 Flight Plan Catalog Page Menu

5)

6)

7)

Press the ENT Key. The Flight Plan Catalog Page is displayed. A blank flight plan page is displayed for the first empty storage location. Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint and press the ENT

Key.

Enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint.


Catalog Page.

Creating a new flight plan using map panning:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)


Press the NEW Softkey.

Activate map panning.

Select the desired map location. Undefined locations on the map if selected will be assigned the designation starting with USR000, 001, etc.


Highlight ‘Load Waypoint’ from the list (Figure 5-66).


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Figure 5-66 Load Waypoint Menu Option

7)

Press the ENT Key. The new user waypoint is inserted into the flight plan before the waypoint in the list that was previously highlighted. If nothing is highlighted, it will be placed at the end of the flight plan.

Creating a new flight plan using the menu option:

1)

2)

3)



Highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’ (Figure 5-67).

Figure 5-67 Create New Flight Plan Menu Option

4)

5)

6)

Press the ENT Key. The Flight Plan Catalog Page is displayed. A blank flight plan page is displayed for the first empty storage location. Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint and press the ENT

Key.

Enter the identifier for each additional flight plan waypoint.


Catalog Page.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-71

GPS NAVIGATION

Viewing flight plan information:

1) Select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

2) Highlight the desired flight plan from the list.

3) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude information for the selected Flight Plan (Figure 5-68).


Identifier, Facility,

Symbol, City

Departure Waypoint

Destination Waypoint

Enroute Safe Altitude

Total Flight Plan Distance

Figure 5-68 Viewing Flight Plan Information

Activating (begin to navigate) a stored flight plan:

1)

2)

3)


Highlight the desired flight plan.

Press the ACTIVE Softkey. A confirmation window appears, asking ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ (Figure 5-

69).

5-72

Figure 5-69 Activate Message

4)

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan. To cancel the activation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

6)

7)

8)

1)

3)

4)

5)

OR

:





Select ‘Active Flight Plan’.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window appears, asking ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’.

With ‘OK’ highlighted, Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan. To cancel the activation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

After navigating along a flight plan, the route can be reversed for navigation guidance back to the original departure waypoint.

Inverting a flight plan:

4)

5)

6)

1)

2)

3)

Select the Active Flight Plan Page.


Highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’.

Press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed (Figure 5-70).

Select ‘OK’.

Press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.

Figure 5-70 Invert Flight Plan Menu Option

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-73

GPS NAVIGATION

Inverting and Activating a stored flight plan:

1)

Press the INVERT Softkey from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The ‘Invert and Activate stored flight plan?’ message is displayed (Figure 5-71).

Figure 5-71 Invert and Activate Flight Plan Message

2)

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

OR

:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)





Highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’.

Press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ message is displayed.

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

The ‘Sort by Comment’ menu option sorts flight plans alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned to each flight plan. Procedures on how to enter a comment (flight plan name) are described in the Active

Flight Plan Window section.

Sorting flight plans alphabetically:

1)

2)

3)



Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ (Figure 5-72).

5-74


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Figure 5-72 Sort by Comment Option

4)

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed (Figure 5-73).

Figure 5-73 Proceed Message

5)

With OK highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

Deleting a flight plan (stop navigating):

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Select the Flight Plan Catalog Page


Highlight the flight plan to delete.


Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’ (Figure 5-74).

Figure 5-74 Delete Flight Plan Option

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-75

GPS NAVIGATION

6)

7)

Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the

ENT Key:

1)

2)

3)

4)

OR :



Press the DELETE Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the

ENT Key:

Deleting all flight plans:

1)

2)

2)

3)



Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the

ENT Key.

Changing the flight plan title:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the FMS Knob from the Active Flight Plan Page.

Highlight the Flight Plan Title Field.

Turn the FMS knobs to change/edit the title (Figure 5-75).

Press the ENT Key. Note that title only changes on the Active Flight Planning Window, not the Flight Planning

Catalog Window.

Figure 5-75 Flight Plan Title/Comment Field

5-76


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

W

AYPOINT

D

ELETION

Deletion of a lateral waypoint results in deletion of any vertical constraints at that lateral waypoint. If the altitude of an along track offset waypoint is deleted, the entire waypoint is deleted. Deleting a parent waypoint also deletes any child waypoint consisting of the deleted parent and an along track offset. Deleting the existing along track offset waypoint and creating a new one modifies along track offset distances.

Deleting individual waypoints from the flight plan (except waypoints in the final approach segment):

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the Active Flight Plan Page.

Select the waypoint that is to be deleted.

Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the waypoint (Figure 5-76).

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT

Key.

Figure 5-76 Removal Confirmation Window

Adding a waypoint to a flight plan:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

Select the Flight Plan Catalog Page


Press the EDIT Softkey.

To add a waypoint to the flight plan, select the point in the plan where the new waypoint is to be added. If an existing waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint.

Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.

Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.

Copying a flight plan into another storage slot:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)




Highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’.

Press the ENT Key. A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.

With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the

ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-77

GPS NAVIGATION

Activating a flight plan leg:

1)

2)

3)

From the Active Flight Plan Page, highlight the desired destination waypoint.

Press the ACT LEG Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed (Figure 5-77).

With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the operation, select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT

Key.

Figure 5-77 Activate Window

3)

4)

5)

OR

:

1)

2)

From the Active Flight Plan Page, highlight the desired destination waypoint.


Select ‘Activate Leg’ (Figure 5-78).

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.

With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

Figure 5-78 Activate Leg Menu Option

5-78


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.

Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, departure, or arrival. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach, departure or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the flight plan and an alert is displayed.

Storing an active flight plan:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.


With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

Figure 5-79 Store Confirmation Window

‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a reference waypoint. It can also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.

Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:

4)

5)

6)

1)

2)

3)

From the Active Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.

Select ‘Closest Point of FPL’.

Press the ENT Key. A window is displayed with the reference waypoint field highlighted.

Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint.


The G1000 displays the location, lat/lon, bearing (BRG), and distance (DIST) to the closest point along the flight plan from the selected reference waypoint. To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan, highlight ‘LOAD’ and press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-79

GPS NAVIGATION

TRIP PLANNING

Inset Map

Trip Statistics

Page Mode

Input Data

Other Statistics

Fuel Statistics

5-80

Figure 5-80 Trip Planning Page

Trip Planning

Page Softkeys

The Trip Planning Page (Figure 5-80) displays calculated statistics regarding the projected path of flight, based on a number of input parameters provided. There are two modes of entering the projected flight path, a flight plan mode and a waypoint entry mode. There are two sources of input data, manually entered by the user, or automatically updated through input sensors and equipment. The Trip Planning Page displays the following:

• An Inset Map showing the selected flight plan or flight leg. This map has an appropriate scale in order to see the selection. If there is no selected flight path the map shows the current position.

• The selected flight plan number and selected leg number (in flight plan mode). The selected leg number may be the entire flight plan.

• The selected ‘FROM’ and ‘TO’ waypoints. In waypoint mode these are the selected waypoints. In flight plan mode with a specific leg selected the waypoints shown are the endpoints of the selected leg. In flight plan mode with the entire flight plan selected the waypoints shown are the start and end waypoints of the selected flight plan. In automatic flight plan mode with active flight plan selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the end of the selected leg.

• DEP TIME (departure time) - this defaults to the current time

• GS - ground speed

• FUEL FLOW

• FUEL ONBOARD

• CALIBRATE AS (calibrated airspeed) - in auto mode, the primary source of information is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information is the GPS ground speed.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

• INDICATED ALTITUDE - In auto mode, the primary source of information is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information is the GPS altitude.

• PRESSURE (barometric pressure)

• TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE

TRIP STATS

• DTK (desired track)

• DIS (distance) - the distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9. The distance is shown in whole units up to 9999.

• ETE (estimated time enroute) - this time is either be shown as minutes:seconds, if the time enroute is less than an hour, as hours:minutes.

• ETA (estimated time of arrival)

• ESA (enroute safe altitude) - This value reflects either the ESA for the selected leg, for the route between two selected waypoints, or for the entire flight plan, depending on what is currently selected.

• Destination sunrise and sunset times

FUEL STATS

• EFFICIENCY (fuel efficiency) - this value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current fuel flow.

• TOTAL ENDUR (time of fuel endurance) - this time is shown as hours:minutes and is obtained by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.

• REM FUEL (fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg) - this value is calculated by taking the amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required for trip.

• REM ENDUR (fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg)

• FUEL REQ (fuel required for trip) - this value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel flow.

See fuel endurance for an explanation of how time to go is calculated.

• TOTAL RANGE (total range at entered fuel flow) - this value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel endurance by the ground speed.

OTHER STATS

• DENSITY ALT (density altitude)

• TRUE AIRSPEED

• WIND DIRECTION, WIND SPEED, TAIL or HEAD WIND (only in auto mode) - the head wind is shown as a tail wind value if appropriate.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-81

GPS NAVIGATION

O

PERATIONS

Fuel Planning

The Trip Planning Page displays current fuel conditions along the active direct-to or flight plan using fuel flow and/or fuel totalizer data. Fuel flow, ground speed (GS), and fuel on board values can be manually entered for planning purposes.

Performing manual waypoint fuel planning operations:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

Select the Trip Planning Page.

The current page mode is displayed at the top of the page, ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’. Select the

MANUAL

Softkey.

For direct-to fuel planning, select the

WPTS

Softkey and enter the flight plan departure airport (FROM) in the waypoint field (P.POS; present position).

Select the

ENT

Key and the flashing cursor moves to the ‘to’ waypoint field.

Enter the identifier of the ‘to’ waypoint and select the

Enter the following values:

ENT

Key to accept the waypoint.

•

DEP TIME (departure time) - this defaults to the current time

•

GS - ground speed

•

FUEL FLOW

•

FUEL ONBOARD

•

CALIBRATE AS (calibrated airspeed) - in auto mode, the primary source of information is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information is the GPS ground speed.

•

INDICATED ALTITUDE - In auto mode, the primary source of information is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information is the GPS altitude.

•

PRESSURE (barometric pressure)

•

TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE

Once the last value is entered, fuel statistics for the direct-to are displayed.

Flight Plan

Number

Flight Plan Leg

Number

‘From’

Waypoint

Figure 5-81 Flight Plan Mode

‘To’

Waypoint

5-82


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Performing automatic waypoint fuel planning operations:

1)

2)

3)

4)

The current page mode is displayed at the top of the page, ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’. Select the

AUTO

Softkey.

For direct-to fuel planning, select the

WPTS

Softkey and enter the flight plan departure airport (FROM) in the waypoint field (P.POS; present position).

Select the

ENT

Key and the flashing cursor moves to the ‘to’ waypoint field.

Enter the identifier of the ‘to’ waypoint and select the

ENT

Key to accept the waypoint.

Once the ‘to’ waypoint is entered, fuel statistics for the direct-to are displayed, no manual input of data is required.

Flight Plan Field

Not Accessible

Figure 5-82 Waypoint Mode

For fuel planning using a stored flight plan instead of direct-to waypoints, follow the steps previously given for waypoint fuel planning except enter a desired flight plan number and/or a desired leg of the flight plan instead of waypoints (Figure 5-83).

Figure 5-83 Flight Plan and Leg Number Fields

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-83

GPS NAVIGATION

VERTICAL NAVIGATION

NOTE:

An active flight plan or direct-to must be entered in order to utilize the VNAV feature.

NOTE:

The Vertical Navigation Page Map orientation is always ‘Desired Track Up’.

NOTE:

The VNAV messages (Figures 5-85 and 5-86) will only be displayed if the VNAV messages are enabled.

Press the MENU Key while on the VNAV Page to enable or disable the messages.

Target Distance (from reference)

Target

Reference

Target Altitude

Waypoint

Target Altitude

Map Legend

Target Altitude

Reference (above

WPT or MSL)

Descent Rate

Target

Vertical Speed

Required

Time to Begin

Descent or

Climb

Figure 5-84 Vertical Navigation Page

The Vertical Navigation feature allows the creation of a three-dimensional profile which gives guidance from the present position and altitude to a final (target) altitude at a specified location. This is helpful when the pilot wants to descend to a certain altitude near an airport or climb to an altitude before reaching a route or directto waypoint. Once the profile is defined, message alerts and additional data on the PFD informs the pilot of progress. The Vertical Navigation Page displays the information shown in Figure 5-84.

5-84


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Creating a vertical navigation profile:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the

FPL

Key.

Select the Vertical Navigation Page (third page icon).


With the ‘TARGET POSITION’ distance field highlighted, select the desired distance for Top Of Climb or Bottom

Of Descent from the VNAV profile endpoint. The default distance is 4 nm.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now positioned over the ‘Before’ and ‘After’ field.

5)

6)

7)

8)

Select whether the previously set distance is ‘Before’ or ‘After’ the endpoint.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now placed over the VNAV profile endpoint field.

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to display a list possible VNAV profile endpoints. When using a flight plan, the target reference waypoint itself can be specified from the waypoints contained in the flight plan. By default, the last waypoint in the flight plan is selected. Highlight the desired waypoint.


9)

10)

With the ‘TARGET ALTITUDE’ field highlighted, select the target altitude. If the selected altitude is above the current aircraft altitude, a profiled climb is created. If the selected altitude is below the current aircraft altitude, a profiled descent will be created.

11)

Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now placed in the ‘TARGET VERTICAL SPEED’ field. The default profile utilizes a 400 foot-per-minute descent rate.

12)

To change the vertical speed, enter the desired vertical speed.

13)

Press the ENT Key when finished.

With the profile set, the vertical speed required (VSR) and ‘Begin Climb In’ or ‘Begin Descent In’ time is displayed. Expect the following to occur when using the vertical navigation feature:

At one minute prior to reaching the Bottom Of Climb or Top Of Descent point (gray arc), the message

‘APPR VPROF - Approaching VNAV Profile’ is displayed as a PFD alert (Figure 5-85). The descent (or climb) angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile. If selected, the vertical speed required

(VSR) readout on the default NAV and map pages shows the desired vertical speed to maintain the proper descent (or climb) angle. At 500 feet above (or below, for a climb) the target altitude (white arc), an ‘APPR TRG

ALT’ - Approaching Target Altitude (Figure 5-86) message is provided. The VSR readout on the Navigation Map

Page is blanked out at this point.

Figure 5-85 Approaching VNAV Profile Message (PFD)

Figure 5-86 Approaching Target Altitude Message (PFD)

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-85

GPS NAVIGATION

The VNAV messages are not enabled until the ‘VNAV Messages On?’ option is enabled from the VNAV Page

Menu (Figure 5-87). To display the Page Menu, press the MENU Key (with the VNAV Page displayed). The

VNAV Page Options Menu also allows the pilot to restore VNAV page defaults.

Figure 5-87 Vertical Navigation Page Menu

To view the vertical speed required on any MFD Page, a field in the Navigation Data Box must be configured to display VSR (Figure 5-88, see the System Setup Page Instructions for details).

Figure 5-88 Vertical Navigation Page Menu

FLIGHT PLANNING FROM THE PFD

Flight planning on the PFD centers around the Flight Plan Window (Figure 5-89) where flight plans can be created, edited, and activated. The Flight Plan Window is enabled and disabled by pressing the

FPL

Key.

Flight Plan Title

Desired Track

Active Leg

Next Available

Memory Position

Leg Distance

Figure 5-89 Flight Plan Window

5-86


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

OPERATIONS

The following operations can be performed using the Flight Plan Window Menu (Figure 5-90).

• Activate leg

• Store, invert, or delete flight plan

• Load or remove departure, arrival, or approach

• Closest Point of FPL

• Restore defaults

Figure 5-90 Flight Plan Page Menu

C

REATE

N

EW

F

LIGHT

P

LAN

Up to 99 flight plans with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan can be created and stored in memory.

Creating a new flight plan:

1)


2)

3)

4)

Press the

FMS Knob to activate the cursor. The waypoint field is highlighted.

Enter the identifier, city/state, or facility name of the airport/waypoint.

Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the next empty waypoint field.

5)

6)

Enter the identifier for each additional waypoint.

Press the

FPL

Key to remove the window.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-87

GPS NAVIGATION

A

CTIVATE

L

EG

‘Activate Leg’ selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for navigation guidance).

Activating a flight plan along a specific leg:

3)

4)

5)

6)

1)

2)

2)

Press the FPL Key on the PFD to display the Flight Plan Window.


Highlight the desired destination waypoint.

Press the MENU Key

Highlight ‘Activate Leg’.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.


S

TORE

F

LIGHT

P

LAN

The active flight plan is erased when the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated.

When storing flight plans with an approach, departure or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints in the flight plan. If the navigation database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach, departure or arrival procedure is no longer available, the flight plan becomes “locked” until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan or until the correct navigation database is installed.

Storing a flight plan:

1)

2)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Press the FPL Key on the PFD to display the Flight Plan Window.

Once all of the waypoints have been entered, press the MENU Key to display the menu.

Select ‘Store Flight Plan’.

Press the ENT Key. The Store Flight Plan Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.

Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan in the next available memory slot.


I

NVERT

F

LIGHT

P

LAN

‘Invert Flight Plan’ reverses the active flight plan. After traveling along a flight plan, the pilot may wish to reverse the route for navigation back to the original departure point.

5-88


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Activating an existing flight plan in reverse:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU Key.

Highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.

Select ‘OK’.

Press the ENT Key. The flight plan is now reversed and activated.

D

ELETE

F

LIGHT

P

LAN

The entire flight plan or selected waypoints within the flight plan may be deleted.

Deleting the entire flight plan:

1)

2)

3)

4)

From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU Key.

Highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’

Press the ENT

K

ey.

Press the ENT Key to delete all waypoints in the flight plan.

Deleting selected waypoints in the flight plan:

1)

2)

3)

From the Flight Plan Window, select the desired waypoint.

Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove Waypoint Name?’ Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.


C

LOSEST

P

OINT OF

FPL

‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference waypoint. It may also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.

Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)


Highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’.

Press the ENT Key. A window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted.

Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint.

Press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan from the selected reference waypoint.

To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan, press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier or the reference waypoint.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-89

GPS NAVIGATION

5.19 PROCEDURES

DEPARTURES, ARRIVALS, AND APPROACHES (MFD)

Options

Arrival Loaded in Active

Flight Plan

Departure Procedure

Loaded in Active Flight

Plan

Approach Procedure

Loaded in Active Flight

Plan

5-90

Figure 5-91 Procedures Window

DEPARTURE OPERATIONS

Loading and activating a departure procedure:

4)

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

Press the

PROC

Key. The Procedures Window is displayed (Figure 5-91).

Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.

Press the ENT Key. The DEPARTURE window is displayed on the ‘PROC – DEPARTURE LOADING Page.

Select a departure.

Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.

Select a runway.

Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.

8)

9)

Select a transition.


10)

With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The departure procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.

11)

Highlight the desired transition waypoint.

12)

Press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.

13)

Press the ENT Key. The departure will be active when the flight plan is active.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

4)

OR :

With the Departure Loading Page displayed (Figure 5-92), press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

Enter an identifier, facility name or city location field.

Press the ENT Key until the DEPARTURE window is displayed.

Select a departure.

Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed.

Select a runway.

Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window may be displayed.

8)

9)


Press the ENT Key. The departure is now ready to load.

10)


Airport

Symbol

Airport Usage

Identifier

Location

Facility Name

Available

Departures

Map Showing

Selected

Departure

List of Legs in Departure

Sequence

Figure 5-92 Departure Loading Page

Activating a departure leg:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)



Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint within the departure.

Press the ACT LEG Softkey. A confirmation window showing the selected leg is displayed.

With ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-91

GPS NAVIGATION

Figure 5-93 Activate Leg Option

Viewing a Departure Airport:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Select the Departure Information Page.


Highlight ‘View Departure Airport’.

Press the ENT Key. The Departure Airport Page is displayed.

OR

:

1)

Select the Approach Information Page.

2)


1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

3)

4)


Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed.

OR

:

Select the Arrival Information Page.



Press the ENT Key. The Departure Information Page is displayed.

Enter an identifier, facility, or city name for the departure airport.

Removing a departure:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Select the ‘Remove Departure’ option.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the procedure.


Key.

5-92


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

ARRIVAL OPERATIONS

Selecting the Arrival Loading Page (Figure 5-94):

1) Select the ‘WPT’ page group.

2) Select the first rectangular page icon.

Facility Name

Airport

Identifier

Map Showing

Selected Arrival

Airport Symbol

Airport

Usage

Airport

Location

Available

Arrivals

Available

Transitions

Available

Runways

List of Legs,

Desired Track, and Distance in

Arrival

Sequence

Figure 5-94 Arrival Loading Page

Loading an arrival procedure:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

From the Active Flight Plan Window, press the LD STAR Softkey.

The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page (Figure 5-94).

Select an arrival.

Press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.


Press the ENT Key. The RUNWAY window may be displayed. If so, select a runway.


With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan and is placed in front of the enroute flight plan.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-93

GPS NAVIGATION

5)

6)

7)

1)

2)

3)

4)

OR :

Press the PROC Key.

Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.

Press the ENT Key. The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page.

Select an arrival.




8)

9)



OR

:

1)

2)

From the Active Flight Plan page, press the MENU Key.

Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.

1)

2)

3)

4)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

Press the ENT Key. The ARRIVAL window is displayed on the ‘PROC – ARRIVAL LOADING’ Page.

Select an arrival.





9)


OR :



Highlight ‘Load Arrival’.

Press the ENT Key. The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. The arrival procedure is displayed as part of the overall flight plan and is placed after the enroute flight plan.

5-94


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

View an arrival:

1)

2)

3)

Select the Departure Information Page.


Highlight ‘View Arrival’.

4)

Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Information Page is displayed.

OR

:

1)


2)

3)

4)


Highlight ‘View Arrival Airport’.

OR

:

1)

2)

Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Airport Page is displayed.

Select the Approach Information Page.


3)

4)

Highlight ‘View Arrival’.

Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Information Page is displayed.

Removing an arrival:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Select the ‘Remove Approach’, ‘Remove Arrival’ or ‘Remove Departure’ option.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the procedure.


Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-95

GPS NAVIGATION

APPROACH OPERATIONS

Since not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use. When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver.

Some procedures will not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of

ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.

Facility Name

Airport

Identifier

Airport Symbol

Airport

Usage

Airport

Location

Map Showing

Selected

Approach

Available

Approaches

List of Legs,

Desired Track, and Distance in

Arrival

Sequence

Figure 5-95 Approach Loading Page

5-96


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Loading a instrument approach:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

From the Active Flight Plan Window, press the LD APR Softkey. The APPROACH window is displayed on the

‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page (Figure 5-96).

Select an approach and press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.

Select a transition (the ‘VECTORS’ option assumes vectors will be received to the final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course).


Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.

If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the ENT Key.

Figure 5-96 Not Approved for GPS Message

OR

:

1)

2)

Select the Nearest Airports Page.

Select the desired nearest airport.

6)

7)

8)

3)

4)

5)

Press the APR Softkey. The LD APR (load approach) Softkey becomes available.

Select the desired approach.

Press the LD APR Softkey. The Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.

Select the desired transition.

Press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.

Press the ENT Key to load the approach. If navigating a flight plan previous to loading this approach, the

G1000 will continue navigating the flight plan until the approach is activated.

9)

Highlight the ‘ACTIVATE’ field.

10)

Press the ENT Key to activate the approach and begin navigating to the IAP.

11)

If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message (or select ‘NO’).

12)

Press the ENT Key to return to the Approach Loading Page.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-97

GPS NAVIGATION

3)

4)

5)

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

OR :

From any page, press the PROC Key. The Procedures Options MENU is displayed.

Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.

Press the ENT Key. The APPROACH window is displayed on the ‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page.

Select an approach.



7)

8)


Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.

9)

If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the ENT Key.

OR

:

1)

2)


Highlight ‘Load Approach’.

6)

7)

8)

Press the ENT Key. The APPROACH window is displayed on the ‘PROC – APPROACH LOADING’ Page.

Select an approach and press the ENT Key. The TRANSITION window is displayed.



Highlight ‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’. ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without immediately using the approach for navigation guidance. This allows for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.

If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the ENT Key.

5-98


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

Removing an approach from a direct-to or active flight plan:

1)

2)

3)

4)


Highlight ‘Remove Departure’, ‘Remove Arrival’, or ‘Remove Approach’

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window appears listing the procedure that is about to be removed with ‘OK’ highlighted.


Another Procedures Window option allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.

Activating a (previously loaded) approach, with vectors to final:

1)

2)

Press the

PROC

Key to display the Procedures Window.

Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.

In many cases, it may be easiest to “Load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’, which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active. Otherwise, activate the full approach using the

‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ option.

Activating a missed approach:

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the PROC Key.

Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.

Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window will be displayed.

With ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-99

GPS NAVIGATION

DEPARTURES, ARRIVALS, AND APPROACHES (PFD)

The Procedures Window (Figure 5-97) provides direct access to departures, arrivals and approaches—based upon the active flight plan or direct-to destination. In either case, the departure and destination airports must have published procedures associated with them. The Procedures Window is displayed and removed by pressing the PROC Key.

Figure 5-97 Procedures Window

SELECT DEPARTURE

‘Select Departure’ selects a published standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure airport or replaces the current departure with a new selection. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available departures.

Available

Runways

5-100

Available

Departures

Figure 5-98 Selecting a Departure

Selecting a departure for the departure airport:

1) Display the Procedures Window by pressing the PROC Key.

2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.

3)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key.

4)

7)

Enter an identifier, city, or facility name.

5)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key until the departure field is highlighted

6) Select the desired departure.

.

Pr ess the

ENT

Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the departure.


Available

Transitions

190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

8) Select the desired transition or vectors.

9)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key. A window appears listing the available runways for the departure.

10)


11)

Wi th ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the

ENT

Key to load the departure.

SELECT ARRIVAL

‘SELECT ARRIVAL’ selects a published standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport or replaces a current arrival with a new selection.

Available

Transitions

Available

Arrivals

Figure 5-99 Selecting an Arrival

Selecting an arrival for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:


2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.

3)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key.

4)


5)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key until the arrival field is highlighted

6) Select the desired arrival.

.

7)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the arrival.


9)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key. A window appears listing the available runways for the arrival.

10)


11)


ENT

Key to load the arrival.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-101

GPS NAVIGATION

SELECT APPROACH

‘SELECT APPROACH’ selects a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replaces the current approach with a new selection.

Available

Approaches

Available

Transitions

Figure 5-100 Selecting an Approach

Selecting an approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport (Figure 5-100):


2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’.

3)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key.

4)

5)


Pr ess the

ENT

Key until the approach field is highlighted

6) Select the desired approach.

.

7)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key. A window appears listing the available transitions for the approach.


9)

Pr ess the

ENT

Key.

10)


ENT

Key to load the approach OR: to activate the approach, highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’.

NOTE:

If the approach is not approved for GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ message is displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the

ENT Key to acknowledge the message. To cancel the approach, select ‘NO’ and press the ENT Key.

5-102


190-00592-01 Rev. A

GPS NAVIGATION

ACTIVATE APPROACH

‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ activates the approach.

Figure 5-101 Activate Approach Selection

Activating the approach for a direct-to or flight plan destination airport:

1)

2)

3)

From an active flight plan, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Options Window.

Highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’.


ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL

‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ allows the pilot to select vectors to the final approach course.

Figure 5-102 Activate Vector-To-Final Selection

Activating the approach with vectors to final:

1)

2)

3)

From an active flight plan, press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Options Window.

Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’.


190-00592-01 Rev. A


5-103

GPS NAVIGATION

B

LANK

P

AGE

5-104


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE

The hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.

Hazard avoidance in the G1000 is divided into the following categories:

Weather

• GDL 69/69A™ XM WX Satellite Weather®

Terrain Avoidance

• Terrain Proximity (non-TSO-C151b-certified)

Traffic

• TIS (Traffic Information Service)

6.1 XM WX SATELLITE WEATHER

NOTE:

XM WX Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Never use it to penetrate hazardous weather.

The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted data-link satellite receiver that is capable of receiving XM WX Satellite

Weather data and displaying received graphical weather information and associated text on the G1000 Multi

Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. It can also receive XM Satellite Radio® entertainment programming. Both weather and entertainment services operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.

The GDL 69/69A has an externally-mounted antenna for receiving satellite signals. Because reception must be unobstructed, XM Satellite Radio does not function inside the hangar.

XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.xmradio.com.

ACTIVATING XM WX SATELLITE WEATHER AND XM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES

Before XM WX Satellite Weather can be used, the service must be activated. For the GDL 69, the Radio ID

(for weather data) of the Data Link Receiver is required to initiate the subscription. With the GDL 69, only the weather service subscription can be activated.

For the GDL 69A, both the Audio ID (for entertainment programming) and the Radio ID (for weather data) of the Data Link Receiver are required to initiate the subscription. With the GDL 69A, both the entertainment programming and the weather service subscriptions can be activated.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-1

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

These IDs are located:

• On the label on the back of the unit

• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (as shown in Figure 6-1)

• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit

Contact the installer if the Audio ID and the Radio ID cannot be located.

Activating the XM WX Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio Service:

4)

5)

6)

1)

Contact XM Satellite Radio through the Internet or by telephone. Follow the directions provided by XM Satellite

Radio.

2)

Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.

3)

Turn the small FMS Knob to select to select the fifth page.

Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.

Verify that the desired services are activated and press the DONE Softkey.

Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’. To complete activation, press the ENT Key.

Data

Radio ID (for XM

Weather)

Audio

Radio ID (for XM

Satellite Radio)

Weather

Products

(Available

Products for

Service Class

Indicated in

Green)

6-2

Figure 6-1 XM Information Page

USING XM WX SATELLITE WEATHER PRODUCTS

The Weather Data Link Page is the primary starting point for viewing weather data because it can display all available weather products. Other G1000 maps display only a subset of weather products.

The G1000 displays XM WX Satellite Weather data on the MFD and the PFD Inset Map. When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map, the time associated with the data displays on the right of the screen (as shown in Figures 6-2 and 6-3). The date/time stamp on the G1000 display represents the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time when the data was assembled on the ground.

It is not the time the data was received by the Data Link Receiver.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Each weather product is refreshed on the display at specific intervals (as shown in Table 6-1). The refresh rate represents the maximum waiting period for data to appear on the display after the Data Link Receiver is activated. It does not represent the rate at which XM Weather data is updated. Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM Satellite Radio.

If, for any reason, the data for a weather product is not refreshed within a 30-, 60-, or 90-minute interval

(as specified in Table 6-1), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This prevents the display of ineffective data. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product and time changes from light blue to amber.

Selecting the Weather Data Link Page:

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.

NEXRAD

Products, Storm

Legend, and Age

Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link Page

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-3

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-3 Weather Product Ages

6-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Table 6-1 shows the weather products and their lifetimes.

Weather Product

NEXRAD

Symbol

Expiration Time

(Minutes)

30

Refresh Rate

(Minutes)

5

Cloud Top (CLD TOP) 60 15

Echo Top 30 7.5

XM Lightning (LTNG)

Cell Movement (SCIT)

SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)

METARs

City Forecast (CITY)

Surface Analysis (SFC)

Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)

Winds Aloft (WIND)

County Warnings (COUNTY)

Cyclone Warnings (CY-

CLONE)

Radar Coverage

TFRs

TAFs

60 no product image no product image no product image

30

60

60

Table 6-1 Weather Product Lifetimes

60

60

60

60

90

60

30

30

60

12

12

12

12

5

12

12

12

5

12

12

12

5

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-5

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Table 6-2 shows which XM Weather products display on specific pages of the MFD and the PFD Inset Map.

The positive symbols represent the presence of this data on the page.

Weather Product

NEXRAD

Cloud Top (CLD TOP)

Echo Top

XM Lightning (LTNG)

Cell Movement (SCIT)

SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)

METARs

City Forecast (CITY)

Surface Analysis (SFC)

Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)

Winds Aloft (WIND)

County Warnings (COUNTY)

Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)

Radar Coverage

TFRs

TAFs

+ + +

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+ +

+ +

Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

SETTING UP THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE

The display of weather data on the Weather Data Link Page can be set up and customized on the Weather

Data Link Menu (as shown in Figure 6-4). Weather legends for all active products can also be accessed from this page.

6-6

Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link Menu


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-5 shows the Weather Data Link Setup Window. The ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ settings control the display of weather product softkeys in the same way that softkeys do. The range settings control the largest map range at which each product will display. The default settings can be restored by pressing the MENU Key while in the menu.

Winds Aloft

Data Selected

Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link Setup Window

Setting up and customizing the display of weather data on the Weather Data Link Page:

1)

2)

3)

On the Weather Data Link Page, press the

MENU

Key.

While the Weather Setup selection is highlighted on the Page Menu (as shown in Figure 6-4), press the

ENT

Key.

If necessary, turn the small

FMS

Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and then press the

ENT

Key.

While the Weather Data Link Setup Menu (as shown in Figure 6-5) is displayed, turn the large

FMS

Knob to highlight and move between the product selections. Turn the small

FMS

Knob to select an option for each selection and press the

ENT

Key.

MAP PANNING ON THE WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE

Map panning (as shown in Figure 6-6) moves the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map range. Press the Joystick to select the map panning feature.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-7

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Information about Warning

Panning Arrow over a

Tornado Warning

Figure 6-6 Panning on the Weather Data Link Page

When map panning is enabled, a map pointer flashes on the Weather Data Link Page. Panning over

AIRMETs, County Warnings, TFRs (Temporary Flight Restrictions), Echo Tops, METARs, SIGMETs, and Cell

Movement displays text information for the selection. This information is displayed in the same location as the Map Pointer Information on the Navigation Map Page.

Displaying information for selected weather products:

1) Press the Joystick to display the map pointer.

2) Move the Joystick to place the map pointer on AIRMETs, TFRs, METARs or SIGMETs.

3) To display the text of AIRMET and SIGMET alerts, pan over the AIRMET or SIGMET and press the ENT Key.

4)

To display the text of a METAR (as shown in Figure 6-7), pan over an airport with METAR information and press the

ENT

Key. (Select the Airport Information Page to display the text of the METAR.)

6-8


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-7 METAR with Text

5)

To display the text of a TFR (as shown in Figure 6-8), pan over the TFR and press the

ENT

Key.

Figure 6-8 TFR with Text

XM WX SATELLITE WEATHER ON THE NAVIGATION MAP

When appropriately configured, the Navigation Map displays NEXRAD, Cell Movement, TFRs, and XM

Lightning data (as shown in Figure 6-9). This improves situational awareness and makes it easier to relate storm activity to airports, NAVAIDS, obstacles, and other ground references.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-9

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

NEXRAD

Products, Storm

Legend, and Age

NEXRAD

Weather

Cell Movement

Indication

NEXRAD and XM

Lightning Icons, 800

NM Range

Figure 6-9 Navigation Map Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather

SETTING UP THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE

Use the Map Setup Window (as shown in Figure 6-10) to customize the display of XM WX Satellite Weather data on the Navigation Map Page.

Figure 6-10 Map Setup Window

6-10


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Setting Up and Customizing the Navigation Map Page:

1)

2)

3)

4)

On the Navigation Map page, press the MENU Key.

While the ‘Map Setup’ selection is highlighted on the Page Menu, press the ENT Key.

Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. To select the ‘Weather Group’, turn the FMS

Knob and press the ENT Key.

While the Map Setup menu is displayed, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections. When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired option and press the

ENT Key.

The following options are available:

• NEXRAD DATA – Turns the display of NEXRAD data and radar coverage on or off. Selects the display range.

• XM LTNG – Turns the display of XM Lightning on or off. Selects the display range.

• CELL MOVEMENT – Turns the display of storm cell movement on or off. Cell Movement is shown only when NEXRAD is turned on, even if it is set to ‘ON’ in the Map Setup Window.

WEATHER SOFTKEYS

Softkeys control the display of weather information on the MFD and PFD Inset Map. Product legends are only available on the Weather Data Link Page of the MFD.

The Weather Data Link Page is the primary starting point for weather data with the G1000 because it displays all available weather products. Other G1000 maps display a subset of weather products. When a weather product is selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray. This indicates that the product is enabled. Unavailable weather products have dimmed or disabled softkey labels.

LEGEND

Each active weather product has its own legend. Note that weather product legends are not interchangeable.

Viewing a weather legend:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.

Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.

Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.

To return to the previous page and remove the legend window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT Key or CLR

Key, or the FMS Knob.

OR

:

6)

7)

On the Weather Data Link Page, press the MENU Key, which displays the Page Menu Options.

Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-11

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

NEXRAD

NOTE:

The TOPO and/or TERRAIN display and NEXRAD are mutually exclusive for all applicable maps.

NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar) is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). Its technical name is WSR-88D.

NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nautical miles. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.

NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of

NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of predeparture and enroute evaluation.

6-12

Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link Page

Press the NEXRAD Softkey to show NEXRAD weather and radar coverage information (as shown in Figure

6-11). NEXRAD data displays on the PFD Inset Map and on the following G1000 maps:

• Weather Data Link Page

• Navigation Map

• Nearest Pages

• Airport Information Page

• AUX - Trip Planning Page

• Flight Plan Pages (except VNAV)

Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend (as shown in Figure 6-12), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.

Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data with Legend

The display of Radar Coverage is always active when both NEXRAD and ECHO TOPS are selected. The display indicates the currently available NEXRAD Radar coverage and ECHO TOPS areas.

R

EFLECTIVITY

Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex.

The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.

The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected

back to

the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.

NEXRAD L

IMITATIONS

NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations. These include but are not limited to:

• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-13

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the site.

• The resolution of displayed NEXRAD data is four square kilometers (as shown in Figure 6-13). Therefore, when zoomed in on the display, each square block represents a four-square kilometer area. The intensity level reflected by the square is the highest level sampled within the area.

Block has an area of 4 sq. km

6-14

Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed

NEXRAD radar images may display abnormalities. These include but are not limited to:

• Ground clutter

• Strobes and spurious radar data

• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)

• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows

• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans

ECHO TOPS

NOTE:

Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be turned on at the same time.

Echo Tops data (as shown in Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds, only the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. The information is derived from NEXRAD data.

Echo Tops data displays only on the Weather Data Link Page. It does not display on other G1000 maps.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Press the ECHO TOP Softkey to show data about the highest radar echo. Note that Cloud Tops and Echo

Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude. Cloud Tops and Echo Tops are mutually exclusive.

When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops are removed.

Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data

For the Echo Tops legend (as shown in Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for display.

Radar Coverage

Figure 6-15 ECHO TOPS Legend

The display of Radar Coverage is always active when NEXRAD and Echo Tops are selected. The display indicates the currently available NEXRAD Radar coverage and Echo Tops areas by showing a grayish-purple color where information is unavailable or is not being collected. This means that the radar capability exists in the grayish-purple areas, but that it is not active or is off-line.

CLOUD TOPS

NOTE:

Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be turned on at the same time.

Cloud Tops data (as shown in Figure 6-16) shows the altitude at the top of the clouds. This is determined from satellite imagery.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-15

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Cloud Tops data displays only on the Weather Data Link Page. It does not display on other G1000 maps.

Press the CLD TOP Softkey to show the cloud top altitude. Note that Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude. Cloud Tops and Echo Tops are mutually exclusive. When Cloud

Tops is activated, Echo Tops is removed.

Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data

For the Cloud Tops legend (as shown in Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for display.

6-16

Figure 6-17 CLOUD TOPS Legend

LIGHTNING

Lightning data (as shown in Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. Strike location is shown within a two kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.

Press the LTNG or XM LTNG Softkey to show the location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. Lightning data displays on the PFD Inset Map and on the following G1000 maps:


• Navigation Map

• Nearest Pages




190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-18 NEXRAD and Lightning Data

For the XM Lightning legend (as shown in Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.

Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend

CELL MOVEMENT

Cell Movement data (as shown in Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the ground-based system. The cells are represented by yellow squares, while the movement is represented by arrows.

Press the CELL MOV Softkey to show the storm cells. Cell Movement data displays on the PFD Inset Map and on the following G1000 maps:


• Navigation Map

• Nearest Pages



190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-17

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Cell

Movement

Data

Figure 6-20 NEXRAD, Lightning, and Cell Movement Data

For the Cell Movement legend (as shown in Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.

Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend

SIGMETS AND AIRMETS

SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETS (Airmen’s Meteorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather that is considered of extreme importance to all aircraft. A convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position.

Press the SIG/AIR Softkey to show SIGMET and AIRMET data. SIGMET and AIRMET data display on the

Weather Data Link Page (as shown in Figure 6-22). They do not display on other G1000 maps.

6-18


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-22 SIG/AIR and Cloud Tops Data

For the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (as shown in Figure 6-23), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and AIRMETs are selected for display.

Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend

To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET (as shown in Figure 6-24), press the Joystick and move it over the icon. Press the ENT Key.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-19

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6-20

Figure 6-24 Sample SIGMET Text

METARS AND TAFS

NOTE:

The atmospheric pressure on the METAR is reported in hectopascals everywhere but in the US, where it is reported in inches of mercury. Temperatures are reported in Celsius. Standard temperature and atmospheric pressure are 59°F (15°C) and 29.92 in Hg (1013.2 hPa).

NOTE:

METAR and City Forecast information is only displayed within the installed Aviation Database service area.

METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report) is the standard format for pre-flight weather briefings. METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. A typical METAR report (as shown in Figure 6-25) contains information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. It can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.

By contrast, the TAF (Terminal Aerodrome Report) is the standard format for 24-hour weather forecasts.

The TAF (as shown in Figure 6-25) may contain some METAR data, but it generally covers a smaller area. It typically forecasts significant weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes, and expected changes in weather conditions. METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Data Link Page and the Weather

Information Page.

Viewing METAR and TAF text for a selected airport:

1)

2)

On the Weather Data Link Page, press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.

Press the ENT Key to display the Weather Information Page with METAR and TAF text.

OR

:

3)

Select the Weather Information Page and enter the desired airport.

a)

Use the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.

b)

Use the small FMS Knob to select the first page of the group.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

c)

Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.

d)

Press the FMS Knob momentarily to display the cursor.

e)

Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.

4)

Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR test must be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.

5)

Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page, if the airport was selected by panning from this page.

METAR data is displayed first in a decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form.

METAR

Text

TAF

Text

Figure 6-25 METAR and TAF Text Displayed on the Weather Information Page

For a METAR legend (as shown in Figure 6-26), press the LEGEND Softkey.

Figure 6-26 METAR Legend

MORE WX

Press the MORE WX Softkey to display these additional softkeys:

S

URFACE

A

NALYSIS AND

C

ITY

F

ORECAST

NOTE:

Surface Analysis and City Forecast information display together. They only display within the installed

Aviation Database service area.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-21

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.

Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours (as shown in Figures 6-27 to 6-30).

Surface Analysis and City Forecast information display on the Weather Data Link Page. It does not display on other G1000 maps.

Press the MORE WX Softkey and then the SFC Softkey for Surface Analysis and City Forecast information.

Press the softkey to reflect current conditions or 12-, 24-, 36-, and 48-hour forecasts. The SFC Softkey label changes to reflect the forecast time selected.

Figure 6-27 Current Surface Analysis Data Figure 6-28 12-Hour Surface Analysis Data

Figure 6-29 36-Hour Surface Analysis Data Figure 6-30 48-Hour Surface Analysis Data

For the Surface Analysis legend (as shown in Figure 6-31) and City Forecast legend, press the LEGEND

Softkey when Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.

6-22


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-31 Surface Analysis Legend

F

REEZING

L

EVELS

Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for freezing levels. When no data is displayed for a given altitude for any of the weather features, the data for that altitude has not been received or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next update.

Press the MORE WX Softkey and then the FRZ LVL Softkey to display Freezing Level data. Freezing

Levels data displays on the Weather Data Link page (as shown in Figure 6-32). It does not display on other

G1000 maps.

Figure 6-32 Freeze Level Data with Cloud Tops

For the Freezing Level legend (as shown in Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing

Level is selected to be displayed.

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 6-33 Freeze Level Legend


6-23

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

W

INDS

A

LOFT

Winds Aloft data (as shown in Figure 6-34) shows the wind speed and wind direction at a selected altitude.

The speed and direction can be displayed from the ground up to 42,000 feet in 3,000 ft. increments.

Press the MORE WX Softkey and then the WIND Softkey to display Winds Aloft data. Press the SFC

Softkey to display the surface wind speed and directions. Press any numbered softkey to display the altitude in 3,000 foot increments. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.

Press the NEXT Softkey to display the next set of softkeys. Press the PREV Softkey to return to the previous set of softkeys.

Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft at 27,000 feet with NEXRAD and County Data

For the Winds Aloft legend (as shown in Figure 6-35), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected to be displayed.

6-24


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-35 Winds Aloft with Legend

COUNTY

County data (as shown in Figure 6-36) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, flood conditions, and other natural disasters.

Press the MORE WX Softkey and then the COUNTY Softkey to display current warning data. County warnings display on the Weather Data Link Page. They do not display on other G1000 maps.

Flood Warning

Icon

Figure 6-36 County Flood Warnings

For the County Warning legend (as shown in Figure 6-37), press the LEGEND Softkey when County

Warnings are selected to be displayed.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-25

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-37 County Warnings Legend

CYCLONE

Cyclone data shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and their projected track. The forecasted track can be displayed at various time intervals.

Press the MORE WX Softkey and then the CYCLONE Softkey to display Cyclone data. Cyclone data displays on the Weather Data Link Page. It does not display on other G1000 maps.

For the CYCLONE legend (as shown in Figure 6-38), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be displayed.

Figure 6-38 Cyclone Legend

6-26


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.2 TERRAIN PROXIMITY

CAUTION:

Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is intended only to enhance situational awareness. It is the pilot’s responsibility to provide terrain avoidance at all times.

NOTE:

South.

Terrain Proximity data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60°

G1000 Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C151b-certified terrain awareness system. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT).

Do not confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and is TSO-C151b-certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.

Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:

• Valid 3D GPS position

• Valid terrain/obstacle database

The G1000 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL) based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a reliable MSL altitude source.

Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity feature portrays a 2D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle conditions.

Terrain elevation is shown relative to the aircraft altitude in Figure 6-39. Obstacle symbols and colors are given in Table 6-3. Terrain and obstacles that are above the aircraft or less than 100 feet below the aircraft altitude are shown in red. Those between 100 feet and 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are shown in yellow. Terrain lower than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude is shown in black. Obstacle data is displayed in gray when the difference in aircraft altitude and obstacle height is greater than 1000 feet.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-27

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

��

��

��

��

Terrain Color

Red

Yellow

Black

Terrain Location

Terrain above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude

Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Figure 6-39 Terrain Proximity Indications and Colors

Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:

• Terrain Proximity Page (caution and warning obstacles only)

• Navigation Map

• PFD Inset Map

To display terrain and obstacle data on any page other than the Terrain Proximity Page, press the MAP Softkey, then press the TERRAIN Softkey. Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet above ground level (AGL) are displayed in three color levels (as shown in Table 6-3). The G1000 adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes.

Terrain display may also be deselected from the Inset Map without affecting the terrain display on the MFD maps.

Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle

< 1000 ft AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL



Terrain Color Obstacle Location

Red

Yellow

Gray

Obstacle above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude

Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Obstacle more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Table 6-3 Obstacle Symbols and Colors

6-28


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Obstacles are displayed only at certain map zoom ranges, on certain maps, and will only be displayed if an obstacle database is loaded on the SD card. In addition, all map zoom ranges are dependent on the zoom range setting in the Navigation Map. If the zoom range on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest zoom range on all other maps is adjusted proportionally.

Table 6-4 shows the map pages and the highest zoom range at which obstacles are displayed.

MAP

Navigation Map Page

Inset Map

Range (nm)

50

10

Terrain Proximity Page

AUX - Trip Planning Page

10

10

Active Flight Plan Pages 15

Table 6-4 Zoom Ranges for Displaying Obstacle Data

LIMITATIONS

Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with reference to a database, which may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if available in the database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness, and not to navigate or maneuver around terrain.

• Not all obstructions may be available in the terrain and obstacle database

• No terrain and obstacle information is shown without a 3D GPS position

TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE

NOTE:

The Terrain Proximity Page shows ONLY caution and warning obstacles within a 10 nm range of the aircraft.

The Terrain Proximity Page is in the MAP group of pages and displays the following:

• Current aircraft location

• Range marking rings (25 nm, 25/50 nm, 50/100 nm, and 100/200 nm)

• Heading Box (North Up, Track Up, DTK Up, HDG Up). Heading on the Terrain Proximity Page displays

‘HDG Up’ map data unless there is no valid heading

• Terrain

• Terrain Range - Indicates the terrain elevation in colors relative to the aircraft altitude (Figure 6-40)

Displaying terrain and obstacles on the Terrain Proximity Page:

1)

2)

3)

Turn the large

FMS

Knob to select the Map Page Group.

Turn the small FMS Knob to select the last rectangular page icon.

Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or turn counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-29

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

There are two terrain/obstacle viewing options available (relative to the position of the aircraft), the 360° default display (as shown in Figure 6-40) and the radar-like ARC (120°) display (as shown in Figure 6-41).

Figure 6-40 Terrain Proximity Page

To change the viewing mode between 360° and ARC:

1)

2)

Select the Terrain Proximity Page.

Press the

VIEW

Softkey, then press the

ARC

Softkey or the 360 Softkey.

OR

:

3)

Press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with either ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’. Press the ENT Key to change the view.

Other aviation information such as airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDS can be displayed on the Terrain

Proximity Page.

Showing or hiding aviation information:

1)

2)

3)


Select ‘Show (or Hide) Aviation Data’ and press the ENT Key.

Press the CLR Key to toggle aviation information on or off.

6-30


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Map Range (No

Obstacles Shown

Beyond 10 nm)

Red Terrain Area

(Above or Within 100’

Below Aircraft Altitude

Black Terrain Area

(More than 1000’

Below Aircraft Altitude)

Yellow Terrain Area

(Between 100’ and

1000’ Below Aircraft

Altitude

Terrain Legend

Figure 6-41 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)

NAVIGATION MAP PAGE

Terrain and obstacle data can be displayed on the Navigation Map Page (as shown in Figure 6-42). Obstacles are shown on the Navigation Map Page at or below the map range of 20 nm.

Displaying Terrain Data on the Navigation Map Page:

1)

Press the MAP Softkey.

2)

Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display the terrain and obstacle data on the Navigation Map Page.

3)

Press the TERRAIN Softkey again to remove the terrain and obstacle data from the Navigation Map Page.

R e d L i g h t e d

Obstacles (Above or Within 100’

Below Aircraft

Altitude

Yellow Terrain

Area (Between

100’ and 1000’

Below Aircraft

Altitude

Cursor Placed o n L i g h t e d

Obstacle

Red Terrain

Area (Above or Within 100’

Below Aircraft

Altitude)

Aircraft Symbol

Terrain Legend

Terrain Symbol and Range

Figure 6-42 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-31

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SETTING UP THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE

Use the Map Setup Window (as shown in Figure 6-43) to customize the display of obstacle and terrain data on the Navigation Map Page. Obstacles are displayed based on the selection of each feature.

6-32

Figure 6-43 Map Setup Window

Setting up and customizing the Navigation Map Page:

1)

2)

3)

4)

On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.

While the ‘Map Setup’ selection is highlighted on the Page Menu, press the ENT Key.

Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. To select the ‘Map’ group, turn the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.

While the Map Setup menu is displayed, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the selections.

When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired option and press the ENT Key.

Table 6-5 shows the options for displaying terrain and obstacle data on the Navigation Map only. It does not apply to other maps.

TERRAIN DATA

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OBSTACLE DATA

OFF

ON

DISPLAYED ON NAVIGATION MAP PAGE

No obstacles or terrain displayed

SAFE, CAUTION, and WARNING obstacles displayed

OFF CAUTION and WARNING terrain displayed

ON SAFE, CAUTION, and WARNING obstacles and terrain displayed

Table 6-5 Obstacle Data on the Navigation Map Page


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.3 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)

Warning:

The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended only to help the pilot visually locate traffic. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.

NOTE:

Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and

Traffic Information Service (TIS). Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.

The Traffic Map Page is the second page in the Map Group and displays the following information:

• Current aircraft location, surrounding Traffic Information Service (TIS) traffic, and range marking rings

• The current traffic mode (OPERATE, STANDBY)

• A traffic alert message (FAILED, DATA FAILED, NO DATA, UNAVAILABLE)

• Traffic display banner of all possible system statuses (AGE MM:SS, TRFC COAST, TA OFF RANGE, TRFC

RMVD, TRFC FAIL, NO TRFC DATA, TRFC UNAVAIL, TRAFFIC)

Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Turn the large

FMS

knob to select the Map Page Group.

Turn the small FMS knob to select the Traffic Map Page.

Press the

OPERATE

Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘TIS OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.

Press the

STANDBY

Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘TIS STANDBY’ displays in the Traffic mode field.

Turn the

Joystick

clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-33

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Operating

Mode

Traffic Advisory, Aircraft is 400’ Above and

Descending, Moving in the Direction of the Line

Traffic Out of

Range

6-34

Traffic Banner

Last Data

Update is Older than 6 Seconds,

Resulting in

Coast Mode

Proximity Traffic at Same

Altitude, Level Flight and

Moving in the Direction of the

Line

Traffic 1600’ Above and

Climbing, Moving in the

Direction of the Line

Figure 6-44 Traffic Map Page

Traffic information can be displayed on the following other pages by pressing the MAP Softkey, followed by the

TRAFFIC Softkey:

• Navigation Map

• WPT - VOR Information Page

• PFD Inset Map


• Nearest Pages

If data is not received for a period longer than six seconds, the age of the present data will be displayed in the lower left of the screen along with the annunciation that the system has entered Coast mode. The system will maintain the traffic display (up to 60 seconds) until the next data reception. If no data is received after 60 seconds, traffic will be removed from the display.

TIS SYMBOLOGY

Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help pilots detect and avoid aircraft intersecting their flight path. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link.

TIS receives traffic information from ground stations and provides a five-second update rate. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 nm radius, from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed on the Traffic Map Page according to TCAS symbology. Traffic is displayed using four different symbols (as shown in Table 6-6).


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TIS Symbol Description

Non Threat Traffic

Proximity Advisories (PA)

Traffic Advisories (TA)

Traffic Advisory Off Scale

Table 6-6 Additional System Annunciations

Proximity Advisories (PAs) are defined as traffic within the 5.0-nm range, within ±1200 ft. of altitude separation. They are not Traffic Advisories (TA). When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. TIS provides vector lines showing the direction that the aircraft symbol is moving.

Deviation from aircraft altitude is displayed above the target symbol if the traffic is above the aircraft altitude, and below the symbol if the traffic is below the altitude. Altitude trend is displayed as an up arrow (+500 fpm), down arrow (-500 fpm), or no symbol if less than 500 fpm rate in either direction. The traffic label displays altitude separation and the vertical speed sense arrow to the right of the symbol.

TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

The TIS system performs an automatic test during power-up. If the system passes the power-up test, the standby screen is displayed on the Traffic Map Page. If the system passes the power-up test, and the aircraft is airborne, traffic is displayed on the Traffic Page in the operating mode.

If the system fails the power up test, the ‘NO DATA’, ‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’ message is displayed on the Traffic Map Page. Contact the service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action if the ‘DATA FAILED’ or ‘FAILED’ message is displayed. (The ‘FAILED’ message indicates the Transponder has failed. The ‘DATA

FAILED’ message indicates data is being received from the Transponder, but a failure was detected in the data stream. The ‘NO DATA’ message indicates that data is not being received from the Transponder.)

To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in. Map ranges are 2 nm, 6 nm, and 12 nm.

OPERATING MODE

Once the aircraft is airborne, the system switches from standby mode to operating mode. The G1000 displays ‘TIS OPERATING’ in the upper left-hand corner and begins to display traffic on the Traffic Map Page.

The TIS Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the pilot to an intruding aircraft.

Once the aircraft is on the ground (determined by system configuration at the time of installation) the system switches from operating mode to standby mode. The Traffic Map Page displays ‘STANDBY’.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-35

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

• STANDBY – when the Traffic Map Page displays ‘STANDBY’ in the status box located in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system is in standby mode and cannot display traffic data.

• OPERATE – when the Traffic Map Page displays ‘OPERATE’ in the status box located in the left corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system is in operational mode and available to display traffic.

The pilot can switch between Standby (STBY) and Operating (ON) modes to manually override automatic operation using the page menu or softkeys.

Switching between operating modes:

1)

2)

Press the

MODE

Softkey.

Press the

STANDBY

or

OPERATE

Softkey to switch between modes. ‘TIS STANDBY’ or ‘TIS OPERATING’ is displayed in the status box located in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page,

OR

:

3)

Press the

MENU

Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Standby Mode’ or ‘Operate Mode’ highlighted. Press the

ENT

Key on the desired selection.

TIS AUDIO ALERT

A TIS audio alert is generated whenever the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next. Limiting the TAs only reduces the amount of “nuisance” alerting due to proximate aircraft. For example, when the first TA is displayed, the pilot is alerted audibly. So long as a single TA aircraft remains on the TIS display, no further audio alert is generated. If a second (or more) TA aircraft appear on the display, a new audio alert is sounded. If the number of TAs on the TIS display decreases and then increases, a new audio alert is sounded.

TIS audio alert is also generated whenever TIS service becomes unavailable. The volume of the audio alert

(including the choice between a male or female voice) is configured during installation.

The following TIS audio alerts are available:

• “Traffic” - TIS traffic alert is received.

• “Traffic Not Available” - TIS is not available or out of range.

TIS TRAFFIC STATUS

The MFD indicates the following TIS traffic status to the pilot in the Traffic Banner in the lower left corner of the map. These statuses are a subset of all possible system statuses and only include traffic information.

• AGE - if traffic data is not refreshed within six seconds, an age indicator (‘AGE MM:SS’) is displayed in the lower left corner of the display (when displaying traffic). After another six seconds, if data is still not received, the traffic is removed from the display. The quality of displayed traffic is reduced as the AGE increases.

• TRFC COAST - indicates that displayed traffic is held even though the data is stale. The quality of displayed traffic is reduced when TRFC COAST is displayed.

6-36


190-00592-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

• TRFC RMVD - indicates that traffic has been removed from the display due to the age of the data being too old to “coast” (for the time period of 12-60 seconds from the last receipt of a TIS message). Traffic may be present but not shown.

• TA OFF - the ‘TA OFF’ scale banner displayed in the lower left corner of the display indicates that a traffic advisory is outside the selected display range. The traffic advisory off range banner is removed when the traffic advisory is within the selected display range.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


6-37

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

B

LANK

P

AGE

6-38


190-00592-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW

NOTE:

The approved Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) always supersedes the information in this

Pilot’s Guide.

NOTE:

A failure of the primary (#1) GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the AFCS. Each

IAU contains the AFCS software which controls the flight director. Any IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.

The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G1000 System avionics architecture. Refer to Figure 1-1 in the System Overview for a block diagram supporting this system description. GFC 700 AFCS functionality in the Diamond DA40/40F is distributed across the following Line

Replaceable Units (LRUs):

• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)

• GDU 1042 Multi-Function Display (MFD)

• GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)

• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (3)

• GSM 85 Servo Mounts (3)

The GFC 700 AFCS performs these main operating functions:

• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) GIA 63 Integrated

Avionics Unit (IAU). Flight director commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:

– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance

– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing

– Autopilot communication

• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, pitch trim, and roll servos and provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, AHRS attitude and rate information, and airspeed.

• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the autopilot is not engaged.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-1


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

AFCS CONTROLS ON THE MFD

The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:

AP Key

FD Key

NAV Key

ALT Key

VS Key

FLC Key

HDG Key

APR Key

NOSE UP/NOSE

DN Keys

Engages/disengages the autopilot

Activates/deactivates the flight director only

Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.

Selects/deselects Navigation Mode

Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode

Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode

Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode

Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode

Selects/deselects Approach Mode

Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls

7-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A


ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS

The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:

AP DISC Switch

(Autopilot Disconnect)

Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation

A red AP DISC switch is located on each control stick.

This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect and mute the associated aural tone.

CWS Button

(Control Wheel

Steering)

Momentarily disengages the autopilot and synchronizes the flight director’s

Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)

The CWS button is located on the top of the left control stick.

Upon release of the CWS button, the flight director may establish new reference points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS operation details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.

GA Switch (Go-Around) Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go-Around Mode

The GA switch is located on the left throttle handle.

AP TRIM Switch

(Autopilot Trim)

Used to command manual electric trim

The AP TRIM switch is located on the left control stick.

This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP

(rearward) contacts. The AP TRIM ARM switch can be used to disengage the autopilot and to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.

Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled until both sides of the switch are inactivated.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-3


7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION

The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.

With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.

Maximum commanded pitch (+20°/-15°) and bank (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.

ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR

Pressing the FD or AP Key (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director in default pitch/ roll modes. Pushing the Go Around Switch or any fight director mode key activates the flight director in the respective mode(s). The flight director may be turned off by pressing the FD Key. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.

COMMAND BARS

Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single cue. The Command

Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands, and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.

If the attitude information sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are removed from the display. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.

Figure 7-2 Command Bars

7-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A


AFCS STATUS BOX

Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director roll modes are shown on the left and pitch on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green. Autopilot status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box.

Roll Modes

Autopilot

Status

Pitch Modes

Armed Active Active

AFCS Status Box

Mode

Reference

Armed

Selected Altitude

Command Bars

GPS is Selected

Navigation Source

Figure 7-3 PFD AFCS Display

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-5


7.3 FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection, the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes(s).

Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation, when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for ten seconds.

A flashing yellow mode annunciation indicates either the loss of sensor (AHRS, ADC, IAU) or navigation data

(VOR, LOC, GPS) required to compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level or maintain the pitch angle, depending on the affected axis. The flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. After ten seconds, if no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops and the flight director enters the default mode for the affected axis.

Figure 7-4 Loss of VOR Signal

If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.

7-6


190-00592-01 Rev. A


PITCH MODES

The GFC 700 AFCS offers the following pitch modes:

• Pitch Hold (default mode) – Holds the current aircraft pitch attitude; may be used to climb/descend to the

Selected Altitude

• Altitude Hold – Holds the current Altitude Reference

• Vertical Speed – Maintains the current aircraft vertical speed; may be used to climb/descend to the Selected

Altitude

• Flight Level Change – Maintains the current aircraft airspeed while the aircraft is climbing/descending to the

Selected Altitude

• Glideslope – Intercepts and tracks the ILS glideslope on approach

• Go Around – Automatically disengages the autopilot and commands a constant pitch angle and wings level

The following table lists each pitch mode with the corresponding control and annunciation. The mode reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level

Change modes. The NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys may be used to change the pitch mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change for each mode using the

NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys are listed next to the mode annunciation in the table:

Pitch Mode

Pitch Hold

Altitude Hold

Vertical Speed

Flight Level Change

Glideslope Arm/Capture/Track

Go Around

Control Annunciation Reference Range

(default)

ALT Key

VS Key

ALT nnnnn

VS

PIT nnnn

FT

FPM

FLC Key

APR Key

Go Around Switch

FLC

GS

GA nnn

KT

Table 7-1 Pitch Modes

-15° to +20°

-3000 to +1500 fpm

70 to 165 kt

Reference Change

Increment

0.5°

100 fpm

1 kt

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-7


PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)

When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default.

Pitch Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the mode is activated.

In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch reference is set to the aircraft attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the noseup/down limit.

C

HANGING THE

P

ITCH

R

EFERENCE

When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by :

• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys

• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the

CWS Button

Pitch Hold Mode Active Altitude Hold Mode Armed

Selected

Altitude

Command Bars

Maintain Desired

Pitch Reference

Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode

7-8


190-00592-01 Rev. A


ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)

Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft altitude (to the nearest ten feet) as the Altitude Reference). The flight director’s Altitude Reference is shown in the AFCS Status Box and is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.

Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.

Altitude Hold Mode is armed automatically when the flight director is in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight

Level Change, or Go Around Mode. This armed mode is indicated by a white ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS

Status Box. When armed, the flight director commands a constant acceleration maneuver to capture and level off at the Selected Altitude. When the flight director starts the altitude capture, it transitions to Altitude

Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude; in this case, the Altitude Reference corresponds to the Selected

Altitude. The white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field and flashes green for up to ten seconds to indicate transition to Altitude Hold Mode.

C

HANGING THE

A

LTITUDE

R

EFERENCE

NOTE:

Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight director’s Altitude Reference and does not cancel the mode.

With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the

CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.

If the Selected Altitude is captured during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed. To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected Altitude is captured.

Altitude Hold

Mode Active

Flight Director

Altitude Reference

Selected Altitude

Selected Altitude Bug

Command Bars

Hold Pitch Attitude to Maintain Altitude

Reference

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 7-6 Altitude Hold Mode


7-9


VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)

In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of

Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.

Vertical Speed Mode does not consider the relative position of the Selected Altitude in relation to the current aircraft altitude at the time of mode activation, so it is possible to use Vertical Speed Mode while not climbing/ descending to the Selected Altitude.

Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key; the ‘VS’ annunciation appears in the AFCS Status

Box to indicate the active pitch mode, along with the Vertical Speed Reference to the right. The Vertical Speed

Reference is also displayed above or below the Vertical Speed Indicator, depending on whether the aircraft is climbing or descending. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.

C

HANGING THE

V

ERTICAL

S

PEED

R

EFERENCE

The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above/below the Vertical Speed

Indicator) may be changed by:


• By pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing the CWS Button

Vertical Speed

Mode Active

Vertical

Speed

Reference

Altitude Hold

Mode Armed

Selected Altitude

Vertical Speed

Reference

Vertical Speed

Reference Bug

Command Bars

Indicate Climb

7-10

Figure 7-7 Vertical Speed Mode


190-00592-01 Rev. A


FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)

NOTE:

The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.

Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and altitude. This mode acquires and maintains the Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the

Altimeter). The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change

Mode is indicated by an ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The

Airspeed Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed Reference along the tape.

Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to the Airspeed Reference and the desired flight profile (climb or descent). The flight director maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.

C

HANGING THE

A

IRSPEED

R

EFERENCE

The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be adjusted:


• By pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new airspeed, then releasing the CWS Button to establish the new Airspeed Reference

Flight Level Change

Mode Active

Airspeed

Reference

Altitude Hold

Mode Armed

Airspeed Reference

Airspeed Reference Bug

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 7-8 Flight Level Change Mode


7-11


GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)

NOTE:

Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.

Glideslope Mode is only available when the flight director has been set for approach (see Approach Mode under roll modes) and is annunciated in the AFCS Status Box as ‘GS’. Glideslope Mode is automatically armed under the following conditions:

• Valid localizer frequency is tuned

• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) is in LOC mode, with valid deviation indication

• Valid glideslope deviation

• APR Key is pressed

Figure 7-9 Glideslope Mode Armed

Upon reaching the glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to intercept and track the glideslope.

Approach

Mode Active

Autopilot

Engaged

Glideslope

Mode Active

Active ILS

Frequency

Tuned

Glideslope

Indicator

Command Bars

Indicate Descent on Localizer/

Glideslope Path

LOC2 is Active

Navigation

Receiver on HSI

Figure 7-10 Glideslope Mode

7-12


190-00592-01 Rev. A


GO AROUND (GA) MODE

Pushing the Go Around Switch engages the flight director in a wings level, 7° pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. This mode is a couple pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as ‘GA’ in both the pitch and roll active mode fields. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms

Altitude Hold Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the CWS Button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll

Hold modes.

Go Around Mode Active

Autopilot Disconnect

Annunciation Flashes

Yellow 5 sec

Command Bars

Indicate Climb

Figure 7-11 Go Around Mode

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-13


ROLL MODES

The GFC 700 offers the following roll modes:

• Roll Hold (default mode) – Holds the current aircraft roll attitude or rolls the wings level, depending on the commanded bank angle

• Heading Select – Captures and tracks the Selected Heading

• Navigation (VOR, GPS, LOC, Backcourse) – Captures and tracks the selected navigation receiver on the

HSI

• Approach (VOR, GPS, ILS) – Captures and tracks the selected receiver on the HSI with greater sensitivity for approach

• Go Around – Automatically disengages the autopilot and commands a constant pitch angle and wings level

The following table relates each roll mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the pitch modes section for a discussion on Go Around Mode.

Roll Mode

Roll Hold

Heading Select

Navigation, GPS Arm/Capture/Track

Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track

Navigation, LOC Arm/Capture/Track

(No Glideslope)

Control

(default)

HDG Key

NAV Key

Navigation, Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track

Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track

Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track

Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track

(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)

Go Around

APR Key

Go Around Switch

Table 7-2 Roll Modes

Annunciation

ROL

HDG

GPS

VOR

LOC

BC

GPS

VAPP

LOC

GA

7-14


190-00592-01 Rev. A


ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)

When the flight director is activated (the FD or AP Key is pressed), Roll Hold Mode is selected by default.

This mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box.

Figure 7-12 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation

The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed in Table 7-3.

Bank Angle

< 6°

Flight Director Response

Rolls wings level

6° to 22° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude

> 22° Limits bank to 22°

Table 7-3 Roll Hold Mode Responses

C

HANGING THE

R

OLL

R

EFERENCE

The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then releasing the CWS Button.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-15


HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)

NOTE:

Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading upon release of the CWS Button.

NOTE:

Press the HDG Knob (the SYNC function) to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading.

Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. The annunciation ‘HDG’ appears in the AFCS

Status Box to indicate Heading Select Mode. This mode acquires and maintains the Selected Heading shown on the PFD. The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob on the PFD or MFD. The adjustment is shown by the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI.

Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the Bug is turned more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.

Heading Select

Mode Active

Altitude Hold

Mode Active

Command Bars

Track Selected

Heading

Selected

Heading

Selected

Heading

Bug

Figure 7-13 Heading Select Mode

7-16


190-00592-01 Rev. A


NAVIGATION (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC) MODE

NOTE:

The selected navigation receiver must have a valid signal (VOR, LOC) or active GPS course in order for the flight director to enter Navigation or Approach Mode.

NOTE:

When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director will give commands to capture the active leg at approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director will not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.

NOTE:

Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in

Navigation or Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is released.

NOTE:

When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.

Pressing the NAV Key activates Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation receiver on the HSI (GPS, VOR, or LOC). The mode annunciation in the AFCS Status Box indicates the selected navigation receiver. The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when the HSI is in

GPS mode, and creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation when the HSI is in

VOR or LOC mode. The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.

Navigation Mode can be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC approaches where glideslope tracking is not required. Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft heading. The annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation

Mode.

GPS Navigation

Mode Active

Flight Level

Change

Mode Active

Altitude Hold

Mode Armed

Command Bars

Indicate Left

Turn to Track

GPS Course and

Climb to Intercept

Selected Altitude

GPS is Active

Navigation

Receiver on HSI

190-00592-01 Rev. A

Figure 7-14 Navigation Mode


Selected Course

7-17


APPROACH (GPS, VAPP, LOC) MODE

Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation receiver on the HSI (GPS, VOR, or LOC). The mode annunciation corresponding to the selected navigation receiver (with the exception of VOR, which is annunciated ‘VAPP’ to indicate VOR Approach

Mode) is displayed in the AFCS Status Box. This mode uses the selected navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach.

Approach Mode provides greater sensitivity for VOR tracking than Navigation Mode and allows the autopilot to fly an ILS approach with a glideslope. Glideslope Mode is automatically armed when LOC Approach Mode is selected.

Approach Mode Active Glideslope Mode Active

7-18

Command Bars

Indicate Descent on Localizer/

Glideslope Path

LOC2 is Active

Navigation

Receiver on HSI

Figure 7-15 Approach Mode

N

AVIGATION

/A

PPROACH

M

ODE

A

RMED

NOTE:

If the NAV radio is tuned to a different VOR while in VOR Navigation Mode, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings level) and arms VOR Navigation Mode.

If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when Navigation or Approach Mode is selected, the selected mode is automatically armed.

Figure 7-16 Navigation/Approach Mode Armed

The flight director remains in the active roll mode until entering capture phase, at which point Navigation or Approach Mode is annunciated as the active roll mode in green.


190-00592-01 Rev. A


7.4 AUTOPILOT OPERATION

NOTE:

Refer to the AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.

The Diamond DA40/40F’s autopilot operates flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control.

The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director.

Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch servo.

FLIGHT CONTROL

Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos, based on the active flight director modes. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.

PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM

The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.

When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim.

This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim commands are generated with the AP TRIM Switch. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.

ROLL AXIS

The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to the roll servo motor.

ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT

NOTE:

Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.

When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already engaged) are activated. Engagement is indicated by a green ‘AP’ annunciation in the center of the AFCS Status Box. The flight director engages in

Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated.

Autopilot Engaged

Figure 7-17 Autopilot Engaged

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-19


CONTROL WHEEL STEERING

During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during the maneuver. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.

In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight director modes section for CWS behavior in each mode.

Control Wheel Steering

Figure 7-18 CWS Annunciation

DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT

Automatic disengagement occurs due to:

• System failure

• Inability to compute default flight director modes (FD also disengages automatically)

• Invalid sensor data

• Stall warning

Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or AP TRIM Switch.

Autopilot Automatically Disengaged

Figure 7-19 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement

The autopilot may be manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC or Go Around Switch or the AP Key on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a two-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. The AP DISC or AP TRIM Switch may be used to cancel the aural alert.

Autopilot Manually Disengaged

Figure 7-20 Manual Autopilot Disengagement

7-20


190-00592-01 Rev. A


7.5 EXAMPLE PROCEDURES

NOTE:

The diagrams in this section are for instructional purposes only and should not be used for navigation.

This section provides a scenario-based set of procedures showing various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Reid-Hillview Airport (KRHV) from runway 13L, enroute to Fresno

Yosemite International Airport (KFAT). Per the filed flight plan, the aircraft climbs to an altitude of 7000 feet MSL at a heading of 070° to intercept airway V107.

Airway V107 is flown to Panoche VORTAC (PXN) using VOR navigation, then airway V230 is flown using a

GPS flight plan. On this leg, the aircraft descends to 3000 feet prior to reaching Clovis VORTAC (CZQ) and the

ILS approach to R29R at KFAT is loaded. The ILS approach is flown and a missed approach is executed.

KRHV

070

V 107

27

24

30

21

33

18

Panoche

VORTAC

(PXN)

15

0

12

3

6

V 230

24

27

33

30

Clovis

VORTAC

(CZQ)

21

18

0

15

3

12

6

KFAT

Figure 7-21 Flight Plan Overview

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-21


DEPARTURE

Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:

1)

Upon takeoff, set the Selected Altitude to 7000 feet using the ALT Knob.

To have the autopilot capture this altitude, use Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used.

2)

Upon reaching the desired vertical speed of 1000 fpm, enable the flight director in Vertical Speed Mode.

a)

Press the VS Key. Altitude Hold Mode is armed automatically.

b)

Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in Roll Hold and Vertical Speed modes

3)

Activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb.

a)

Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading to 070°.

b)

Press the HDG Key. The autopilot follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.

4) As the aircraft climbs to the Selected Altitude, the flight director changes from Vertical Speed to Altitude Hold

Mode. This active mode change is indicated by the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashing for ten seconds.

Upon reaching the Selected Altitude, the autopilot completes the capture process and levels the aircraft. From this point, the flight director continues to operate in Altitude Hold Mode.

7-22

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

�

�

Figure 7-22 Departure


190-00592-01 Rev. A


INTERCEPTING A VOR

During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V107 to Panoche

VORTAC (PXN) should now be intercepted.

Intercepting a VOR:

1)

Tune the VOR frequency and activate Navigation Mode.

a)

Use the CDI Softkey to set the HSI navigation source to VOR.

b)

Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to 116°. Note that at this point, the flight director is still in

Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly 070°.

c)

Press the NAV Key to arm Navigation Mode. The white annunciation ‘VOR’ appears as the armed roll mode.

2)

When the CDI shows less than one dot, the flight director changes from Heading Select to Navigation Mode, and the green annunciation ‘VOR’ flashes. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected Course.

3)

The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.

��

070

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Figure 7-23 Intercepting a VOR

�

��

�

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-23


FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE

NOTE:

Changing the navigation source cancels the flight director’s Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to automatically revert to Roll Hold Mode, wings level.

As the aircraft closes on Panoche VORTAC, a GPS flight plan is entered for the next leg, airway V230. To do this, PXN, CZQ, and KFAT are entered into the active flight plan.

The aircraft is currently tracking inbound on the 116° radial of Panoche VORTAC.

Flying a GPS flight plan:

1)

Enter Panoche VORTAC (PXN) and Clovis VORTAC (CZQ) into the GPS flight plan, in preparation to intercept this leg.

Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode.

2) a)

Use the CDI Softkey to put the HSI in GPS mode. This cancels VOR mode on the HSI and the flight director loses the VOR signal. As a result, the VOR annunciation flashes yellow as the autopilot rolls the wings level.

Flashes 10 sec, Transitions to Roll Hold

Mode Unless

NAV Key is Pressed

b)

Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode and cause the autopilot to steer the aircraft toward the active flight plan leg.

If the NAV Key is not pressed within ten seconds of the VOR signal loss, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold

Mode

7-24

3)

Once the flight plan leg is intercepted, the autopilot continues to track GPS guidance to the end of the flight plan.

��

�

�

��

�

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Figure 7-24 Transition to GPS Flight Plan


190-00592-01 Rev. A


FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE DESCENT

While flying the GPS leg from Panoche VORTAC to Clovis VORTAC, the aircraft is cleared to make a descent to 3000 feet in preparation for the approach to KFAT.

Making a Flight Level Change descent:

1)

Enter Flight Level Change Mode.

a)

Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 3000 feet.

b)

Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the

Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed, 142 knots. Altitude Hold Mode is armed automatically.

2)

3)

Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.

Upon capturing the Selected Altitude, the flight director changes from Flight Level Change to Altitude Hold

Mode. The annunciation ‘ALT’ flashes in green to indicate the altitude capture. After the capture is complete, the autopilot holds the aircraft level at the Selected Altitude.

�

��

�

��

��

Figure 7-25 FLC Descent

�

��

��

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-25


ILS APPROACH

Flying an ILS approach:

1)

Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.

a)

Load the Runway 29R ILS approach for KFAT into the Flight Plan and select ‘Vectors to Final’ for the transition.

b)

Set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC and press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.

2)

3)

4)

Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.

In preparation for approach, tune the localizer frequency and select LOC mode on the HSI.

Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.

The autopilot and flight director determine when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course.

5)

The autopilot flies the ILS Approach. At the Decision Height, there are two options:

a)

Push the AP DISC Switch and land the aircraft

OR

:

b)

Use the Go Around Switch to execute a missed approach (refer to the following procedure).

2727 2

1

GPS NA

V Mode

GPS Course

1

21 21

1 18

8

3 3

Clovis

VORTAC

(CZQ)

6 6

1 15

5

2

12 12

122

HDG Mode

291

KFAT

Figure 7-26 ILS Approach to KFAT

2

LOC APR/

GS Mode

5

025

SANGO

4

075

111

3

7-26


190-00592-01 Rev. A


GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH

NOTE:

As a result of the calculations being performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern.

Flying a missed approach:

1)

Push the Go Around Switch at the Decision Height and apply full power to execute a missed approach. The

Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow.

Note that when the Go Around Switch is pushed, the autopilot disconnects and the ‘AP’ annunciation flashes yellow for five seconds.

Flashes 5 sec

2)

Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure.

a)

Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.

b)

Select the CDI Softkey to set the HSI to GPS navigation mode.

c)

Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.

d)

Select the SUSP Softkey to resume sequencing approach legs to the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP). The autopilot flies direct to Clovis VORTAC according to the loaded approach.

3)

Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold. The CWS Button may be used to set a new pitch attitude.

As the Selected Altitude is captured, Altitude Hold Mode becomes active and the autopilot maintains the

Selected Altitude.

4)

To use the autopilot to fly the hold, set the Selected Heading using the HDG Knob and press the HDG Key. Use the HDG Knob to guide the aircraft for the remainder of the hold.

190-00592-01 Rev. A

33

0

3

127

6

27

4

CZQ

21

18

15

12

GPS

N

AV

Mode

3

2

KFAT

GA Mode

1

Figure 7-27 Go Around/Missed Approach


7-27


7.6 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS

AFCS STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the

Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by criticality.

AFCS Status

Annunciation

Figure 7-28 AFCS Status Annunciation

Alert Condition Annunciation

Aileron Mistrim Right

Description

Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction

Aileron Mistrim Left

Elevator Mistrim Down

Elevator Mistrim Up

Pitch Trim Failure

(or stuck MEPT Switch)

Roll Failure

Pitch Failure

System Failure

Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction

If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP

If AP disengaged, move

MEPT switches separately to unstick

Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative

Preflight Test

Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative

AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available

Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion

Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests).

Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure

Table 7-4 AFCS Status Field Alerts

7-28


190-00592-01 Rev. A


OVERSPEED PROTECTION

While in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode, airspeed is monitored by the flight director.

In these modes, commands are limited for overspeed protection. Overspeed protection is provided to ensure the flight director cannot command an attitude which would exceed the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.

When an autopilot overspeed warning occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed

Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.

Airspeed

Indicator

Figure 7-29 Overspeed Annunciation

190-00592-01 Rev. A


7-29


B

LANK

P

AGE

7-30


190-00592-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.1 GDL 69A DATA LINK RECEIVER – XM DIGITAL AUDIO

ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)

NOTE:

Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section for more information about XM Weather products.

NOTE:

The DONE Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69(A) activation data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM

Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev F or later) for further information.

The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver. The XM Radio entertainment feature of the Data Link Receiver is explained in this section.

XM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICE

Digital audio entertainment is available through the XM Satellite Radio Service, received by the GDL 69A

Data Link Receiver. XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.

Entertainment audio must be set up with the MFD softkeys.

If problems occur, ensure that the owner/operator of the aircraft has subscribed to XM Radio service, and that the XM subscription has been activated. If a failure still exists, elementary diagnostic checks of the system are explained in the appendix section for troubleshooting the Data Link Receiver.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


8-1

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

XM INFORMATION PAGE

The XM Information Page provides XM Radio identification numbers, service level, and weather products.

Selecting the XM Information Page:

1)

2)

3)

Turn the large

FMS

Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page. RADIO and INFO Softkeys are displayed.

Press the INFO Softkey to show Radio IDs, Service Class, and Weather Products.

Data

Radio ID

Audio

Radio ID

Weather

Products

Window

RADIO

and

INFO

Softkeys

DONE Softkey

is Used to Save

Activation Data

During Initial Setup.

Figure 8-1 XM Information Page

Each Data Link Receiver contains a unique Data Radio ID and Audio Radio IDs that allow XM to communicate with the radio. The owner must activate XM service by providing the appropriate Radio ID(s) to XM to authorize the installed services for that radio. If XM services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are cleared on the XM Information Page and a yellow ‘Activation Required’ messages shows up in the center of the

Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group).

The ‘Service Class’ refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.

The Weather Products Window shows the list of available weather products and indicates the selected products for the current subscription. The boxes for active weather products are filled. Before activation, all boxes are clear.

8-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

XM RADIO PAGE

The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite

Radio.

Selecting the XM Radio Page:

1)

2)

3)

Turn the large

FMS

Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.

Turn the small

FMS

Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.

Press the

RADIO

Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.

Active

Channel

Channel

List

Categories

Field

Volume

Field

Figure 8-2 XM Radio Page

190-00592-01 Rev. A


8-3

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST

The Active Channel Window on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM

Radio is using.

The Channels List Window of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category. Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.

Stepping through channels one at a time:

1)

While on the XM Radio Page, press the

CHNL

Softkey.

Or

:

2)

3)

Press the

FMS

Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large

FMS

Knob to scroll through the channels.

Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel window, or move down the list with the

CH – Softkey.

Selecting a channel directly:

1)

2)

3)

4)

While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.

Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel window will be highlighted.

Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.

Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.

8-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CATEGORY

The Category Window of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other contents. One of the optional categories is ‘PRESETS’ to view channels that have been programmed.

Selecting a category:

1)

2)

Select the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.

Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.

Or

:

3)

Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Categories’ list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS

Knob and press the ENT Key. Selecting ‘All Categories’ places all channels in the list.

Figure 8-3 Categories List

190-00592-01 Rev. A


8-5

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

PRESETS

Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The Preset channels are selected by pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the Active Channel List.

Setting a preset channel number:

1)

2)

3)

4)

On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS

Softkey to access the first five preset channels ( PS1 - PS5).

Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.

Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.

Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.

Press

SET to

Save Each

Preset Channel

Press

PRESETS to

Access the Preset

Channels Softkeys

Press

MORE to Cycle

Through the Preset

Channels

Figure 8-4 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels

VOLUME

Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.

Adjusting the volume:

1)

2)

3)

With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.

Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL

Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small

FMS Knob).

Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to un-mute the audio.

8-6

Figure 8-5 Volume Control


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS

NOTE:

The Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) supersedes information found in this document.

The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts to the pilot using a combination of the following items:

• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert levels described in a following section. The Annunciation Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the Annunciation

Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.

• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing the

ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the Alerts

Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the pilot can use the FMS Knob to scroll through the alert message list.

• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,

CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By pressing the softkey annunciation, the pilot acknowledges awareness of the alert. The softkey then returns to the previous ALERTS label. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white with black text. The pilot can press the ALERTS Softkey a second time to view alert text messages.

• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears in windows whose information is supplied by a failed

LRU. See the G1000 System Annunciations section for more information.

• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.

See the Alert Levels Definitions section for more information.

190-00592-01 Rev. A

System

Annunciation

Red ‘X’

Annunciation

Window

Alerts

Window

Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System

Softkey

Annunciation


A-1

APPENDIX A

ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS

The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in Diamond DA40/40F aircraft, uses three alert levels.

• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate pilot attention. Warning alert text is shown in red in the

Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a continuous aural tone. A warning alert is also accompanied by a flashing WARNING Softkey annunciation, as shown in Figure A-2. Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops the aural tone.

• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require pilot intervention. Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a single aural tone. A caution alert is also accompanied by a flashing CAUTION Softkey annunciation, as shown in Figure A-2. Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert.

• MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information to the pilot. A message advisory alert does not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory alerts only issue a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation, as shown in Figure A-2. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts

Window.

Figure A-2 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)

A-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

AIRCRAFT ALERTS

The following alerts are configured specifically for the Diamond DA40/40F. Red annunciation window text signifies warnings and yellow, cautions. See the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) for recommended pilot actions.

Annunciation Window Text

OIL PRES LO

FUEL PRES LO *

FUEL PRES HI *

ALTERNATOR

STARTER ENGD

DOOR OPEN

TRIM FAIL

Alerts Window Message

Oil pressure is below 25 psi.

Fuel pressure is below 14 psi.

Fuel pressure is greater than 35 psi.

Alternator failed. Battery is only electrical source.

Starter is engaged.

Canopy and/or rear door is not closed and locked.

Audio Alert

Continuous Aural Tone

L FUEL LOW

R FUEL LOW

LOW VOLTS

PITOT FAIL

PITOT OFF

Autopilot automatic trim is inoperative.

Left fuel quantity is less than 3 gallons.

Right fuel quantity is less than 3 gallons

On-board voltage is below 24 V.

Pitot heat is inoperative.

Pitot heat is off.

Single Aural Tone

None

PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.

MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.

GIA FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the GIAs is inoperative.

* Values differ for the DA40F; refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) for more information.

None

190-00592-01 Rev. A


A-3

APPENDIX A

VOICE ALERTS

NOTE:

Voice alerts are provided to the G1000 by the GIA 63 #1. Should this unit fail, audio and voice alerts are not available.

The following voice alerts can be configured for ‘Male’ or ‘Female’ gender from the MFD AUX - System Setup

Page (refer to the System Overview for more information on the System Setup Page):

Voice Alert Alert Trigger

“Minimums, minimums” Played when the aircraft transitions through the barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA).

“Traffic” TIS voice alert - played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued.

“Traffic Not Available” TIS voice alert - played when the traffic system fails or cannot communicate.

G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS

NOTE:

Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the

G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.

When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the failed data (refer to Figure B-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating

Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.

GIA 63

Integrated

Avionics Units

GIA 63

Integrated

Avionics Units

GDC 74A Air

Data Computer

GEA 71 Engine

Airframe Unit

OR

GIA 63

Integrated

Avionics Unit

GRS 77 AHRS

OR

GMU 44

Magnetometer

GDC 74A Air

Data Computer

Figure A-3 G1000 System Failure Annunciations

GIA 63

Integrated

Avionics Units

GTX 33 Transponder

OR

GIA 63 Integrated

Avionics Units

A-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

System Annunciation Comment

Attitude and Heading

Reference System is aligning.

System Annunciation Comment

Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.

Display system is not receiving attitude information from the

AHRS.

Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.

Display system is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.

Display system is not receiving valid OAT information from air data computer.

Display system is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.

Other Various Red X

Indications

Display system is not receiving valid true airspeed information from air data computer.

GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.

Note that AHRS utilizes

GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if GPS signals are not present (see AFM).

Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.

A red ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation fields) indicates that the field is not receiving valid data.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


A-5

APPENDIX A

G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES

NOTE:

This section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must be considered when responding to a message. The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.

This section describes various G1000 System message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciations section.

PFD/MFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES

Message

DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was lost. Recheck settings.

XTALK ERROR – A flight display crosstalk error has occurred.

PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.

Return unit for repair.

MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs service. Return unit for repair.

The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings.

The pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.

The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 System should be serviced.

Comments

The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 System should be serviced.

PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration error. Config service req’d.

MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration error. Config service req’d.

SW MISMATCH – GDU software mismatch. Xtalk is off.

MANIFEST – PFD1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

The PFD and/or MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

MANIFEST – MFD1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage.

MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage.

The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display. If problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.

PFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck. A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by

MFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.

pressing it several times. The G1000 System should be serviced if the problem persists.

CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration module is inoperative.

The PFD configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low voltage. Reducing power usage.

MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low voltage. Reducing power usage.

The PFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The MFD1 voltage is low. The G1000 System should be serviced.

A-6


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES

Alerts Window Message

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation database error exists.

PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 aviation database error exists.

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap database error exists.

PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap database error exists.

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain database error exists.

PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database error exists.

DB MISMATCH – Aviation database version mismatch. Xtalk is off.

DB MISMATCH – Aviation database type mismatch. Xtalk is off.

Comments

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to reload the aviation database. If problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, The G1000 System should be serviced.

DB MISMATCH – Basemap database version mismatch. Xtalk is off.

DB MISMATCH – Terrain database version mismatch. Xtalk is off.

DB MISMATCH – Terrain database type mismatch. Xtalk is off.

DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database version mismatch. Xtalk is off

DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain database mismatch. Xtalk is off

The PFD and MFD have different aviation database versions installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct aviation database version in both displays.

The PFD and MFD have different aviation database types installed (Americas,

European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct aviation database type in both displays.

The PFD and MFD have different basemap database versions installed.

Crossfill is off. Install correct basemap database version in both displays.

The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct terrain database version in both displays.

The PFD and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct terrain database type in both displays.

The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct obstacle database version in both displays.

The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain databases installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct airport terrain database in both displays.

GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES

Alerts Window Message Comments

GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.

The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable.

The G1000 System should be serviced.

GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration error. Config service req’d.

MANIFEST – GMA1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs service. Return unit for repair.

The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The

G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

BACKUP PATH – Audio panel 1 using backup data path.

The #1 audio panel is using a backup communication path. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


A-7

APPENDIX A

A-8

GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 configuration error. Config service req’d.

GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 configuration error. Config service req’d.

GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature too low.

GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature too low.

GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over temperature.

GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over temperature.

GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.

Return the unit for repair.

GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.

Return the unit for repair.

HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware mismatch. Communication halted.

MANIFEST – GIA1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

MANIFEST – GIA2 software mismatch. Communication halted.

COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.

Reducing transmitter power.

COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.

Reducing transmitter power.

COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs service. Return unit for repair.

COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs service. Return unit for repair.

COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key is stuck.

COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key is stuck.

COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote transfer key is stuck.

COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote transfer key is stuck.

RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not available from FAF to MAP waypoints.

RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not available.

Comments

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to operating temperature.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000

System should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000


There is a hardware mismatch between GIA1 and GIA2. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2.

The transmitter will operate at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000


The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may still be usable. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or

“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.

If the problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.

The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.

GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity

Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.

GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity

Monitoring (RAIM) for the current phase of flight.


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)


POSN ERROR – RAIM has determined GPS position is in error.

DGRD GPS ACC – GPS position accuracy degraded & RAIM unavailable.

GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.

GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.

GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.


GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.


NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. Return unit for repair.

NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. Return unit for repair.

NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote transfer key is stuck.

NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote transfer key is stuck.

G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.

G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.

G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.


G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.


Comments

When a RAIM position error is detected, GPS is flagged and the system no longer provides GPS-based guidance.

GPS position accuracy has been degraded and RAIM is not available.

A failure has been detected in the GPS1 or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is unavailable. The G1000 System should be serviced.

A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still be available. The G1000 System should be serviced.

A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or

“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the G1000 System should be serviced.

A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000


A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver may still be available. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving airspeed.

AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup

GPS source.

AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving any GPS information.

AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving backup GPS information.

AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating exclusively in no-GPS mode.

Comments

The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The

G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS limitations. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 System should be serviced.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


A-9

APPENDIX A

A-10

GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)


MANIFEST – GRS1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

BACKUP PATH – AHRS1 using backup data path.

AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magneticfield model needs update.

GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/

South, no magnetic compass.

Comments

The AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The #1 AHRS is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model when practical.

The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is flagged as invalid.

GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer fault has occurred.

MANIFEST – GMU1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

Comments

A fault has occurred in the GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 configuration error. Config service req’d.

MANIFEST – GEA1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

BACKUP PATH – EIS using backup data path.

Comments

The GEA 71 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GEA 71 is using a backup communication path. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error. Config service req’d.

MANIFEST – GTX1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

BACKUP PATH – XPDR1 using backup data path.

Comments

The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The #1 transponder is using a backup communications path. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

GDL 69 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 configuration error. Config service req’d.

GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.

Comments

GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The

G1000 System should be serviced


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES


GDC1 CONFIG – GDC1 configuration error. Config service req’d.

MANIFEST – GDC1 software mismatch. Communication halted.

BACKUP PATH – ADC1 using backup data path.

Comments

GDC 74A configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 System should be serviced.

The GDC 74A is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

GCU 476 MESSAGE ADVISORIES


GCU CNFG – GCU config error.

Config service req’d.

Comments

GCU 476 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The G1000 System should be serviced.

GCU FAIL – GCU is inoperative.

The GCU 476 has failed. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

GCU PATH – A GCU path has failed.

The GCU 476 is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 System should be serviced when possible.

MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES


FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint is locked.

Comments

Upon power-up, the G1000 System detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.

Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,

OR

Update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.

FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan waypoint moved.

The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new aviation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint locations.

TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.

The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.

DB CHANGE – Database changed.

Verify user modified procedures.

This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually edited. This alert is issued only after an aviation database update.

Verify that the user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.

FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been truncated.

This occurs when a newly installed aviation database eliminates an obsolete approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.

APPR VPROF – Approaching VNAV profile.

APPR TRG ALT – Approaching target altitude.

LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate locked flight plan.

Aircraft is approaching VNAV profile. Prepare to climb or descend to meet VNAV profile.

Aircraft is approaching target altitude. Prepare to level aircraft.

This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with current waypoint.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


A-11

APPENDIX A

MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)


WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint

-[xxxx]

STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.

INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.

ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes.

ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.

ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.

LEG UNSMOOTH – Flight plan leg will not be smooth.

APPR INACTV – Approach is not active.

SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate frequency for approach.

SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for approach.

NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84 waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]

TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has failed.

Comments

Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.

A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.

The aircraft is inside the airspace.

Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within 10 minutes.

Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.

Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.

The approaching flight plan waypoints are too close to allow for smooth turns.

Prepare for steep turns ahead and expect noticeable course deviations.

The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach when required.

The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate

NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.

The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the

CDI to the correct NAV receiver.

The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check position with alternate navigation sources.

The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device should be serviced.

A-12


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

AFCS STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the

Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by criticality.

AFCS Status

Annunciation

Figure A-4 AFCS Status Annunciation

Alert Condition Annunciation

Aileron Mistrim Right

Description

Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction

Aileron Mistrim Left

Elevator Mistrim Down

Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction

Elevator Mistrim Up

Pitch Trim Failure

(or stuck MEPT Switch)

Roll Failure

Pitch Failure

If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP

If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick

Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative

Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative

System Failure

Preflight Test

AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available

Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion

Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests).

Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure

190-00592-01 Rev. A


A-13

APPENDIX A

GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING

Although it is the responsibility of the facility that installed the Data Link Receiver to correct any hardware problems, some quick troubleshooting steps can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure:

• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to XM

• Ensure the XM subscription has been activated

• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver

For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link

Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number.

A-14

Figure A-5 LRU Information on System Status Page

If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:

Message

CHECK ANTENNA

UPDATING

Message Location

XM Radio Page - active channel field


Description

Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required

Data Link Receiver updating encryption code

NO SIGNAL


Weather Datalink Page - center of page

Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver

LOADING

OFF AIR

---



Acquiring channel audio or information

Channel not in service

WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE

XM Radio Page - active channel field Missing channel information

Weather Datalink Page - center of page

No communication from Data Link Receiver within last five minutes

ACTIVATION REQUIRED

Weather Datalink Page - center of page XM subscription is not activated


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B

SD CARD USE

The G1000 System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards are required for terrain database storage as well as aviation database updates.

AVIATION DATABASE

NOTE:

The display downloads the aviation database and stores it internally. The aviation database SD card is not required to remain in the display after the update.

Jeppesen aviation databases are released every 28 days, and are provided directly to the pilot by Jeppesen.

Updates must be loaded to both the MFD and PFD using an aviation database update SD card provided by

Jeppesen. The card reader downloads the aviation database files and stores them in the PFD and MFD internal memory.

Updating the Jeppesen aviation database:

1)

2)

With the G1000 System off, insert the aviation database update SD card into the top card slot of the PFD (Label of SD card facing left).

Turn the G1000 System on. This prompt is displayed on the upper left corner of the PFD:

3)

Press the ENT Key to confirm the database updated. This prompt is displayed:

4)

5)

6)

7)

After the update completes, the PFD starts in normal mode. Remove the aviation database update SD card from the PFD.

Turn the G1000 System off.

Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the MFD. The MFD and PFD aviation databases are now updated.

Verify that the correct update cycle is loaded during startup of the MFD.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


B-1

APPENDIX B

TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATABASES

NOTE:

The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.

NOTE:

Obstacles 200’ and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database.

NOTE: If the Supplemental Data Card is removed from the display, the TOPO and TERRAIN softkeys are not functional and are grayed out on the MFD Map Page.

G1000 topography, terrain, and obstacle data is stored on a Supplemental Data Card provided by Garmin.

The obstacle database update cycle is every 56 days. The terrain database is updated less often, and on an irregular basis. Since these databases are not stored internally in the MFD or PFD, Supplemental Data Cards containing identical database versions must be kept in both displays to retain terrain and obstacle data. A

Supplemental Data Card should be inserted into the bottom card slot of the PFD and MFD.

The obstacle and terrain database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailing in the

‘Aviation Databases’ section of the Garmin website (www.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:

• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended).

• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader.

• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website.

• Existing 010-00330-41 Supplemental Database SD Cards from both PFD and MFD.

B-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B

After the data has been copied to both data cards, perform the following steps:

1)

Insert one card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of the PFD.

2)

Apply power to the G1000 System. View the MFD power-up splash screen. Check that the Terrain and Obstacle databases are initialized and displayed on the scrolling window of the splash screen.

3)

Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.

4)

At the MAP – Navigation Map Page, select the MAP Softkey and check to make sure that the TOPO and

TERRAIN softkeys are functional (not grayed out).

5)

Power down the G1000.

Figure B-1 Power-Up Splash Screen Window

190-00592-01 Rev. A


B-3

APPENDIX B

B

LANK

P

AGE

B-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

B ALT

BARO

BATT

BC

Bearing

BFO

BKSP

BRG

C

CA

CALC

GLOSSARY

AMPS

ANNUNC

ANT

AP

AP DISC

APPR, APR

APT

ARINC

ARSPC

ARTCC

ARV

AS

ASB

ATC

ATCRBS

AUTOSEQ

AUX

ACC

ACT

ADC

ADF

ADI

AF

AFCS

AFM

AFMS

AFRM

AGL

AHRS

AIM

AIRMET

ALT

ALT, ALTN accuracy active air data computer

Automatic Direction Finder

Attitude Direction Indicator

Arc to fix

Automatic Flight Control System

Aircraft Flight Manual

Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement airframe

Above Ground Level

Attitude and Heading Reference System

Airman’s Information Manual

Airman’s Meteorological Information altitude alternator amperes annunciation antenna autopilot autopilot disconnect approach airport

Aeronautical Radio Incorporated airspace

Air Route Traffic Control Center arrival airspeed

Aviation Support Branch

Air Traffic Control

ATC Radar Beacon System automatic sequence auxiliary barometric altitude barometer battery backcourse

The compass direction from the present position to a destination waypoint.

beat frequency oscillator backspace bearing

Celsius

Course to Altitude calculator

CR

CRG

CRNT

Crosstrack Error

CRS

CRS

CRSR

CTRL

Cumulative

CVR

CVRG

CWS

CYL

D ALT

DB, DBASE dBZ

DCLTR, DECLTR

DEC FUEL deg

DEIC, DEICE

Calibrated Airspeed

CLD

CLR cm

CNS

CO

COM

CONFIG

COOL

COPLT

Course

CD

CDI

CDU

CF

CHT

CHKLIST

CHNL

CI

Course to Steer

Indicated airspeed corrected for installation and instrument errors.

Course to DME distance

Course Deviation Indicator

Control Display Unit

Course to Fix

Cylinder Head Temperature checklist channel

Course to Intercept cloud clear centimeter

Communication, Navigation, & Surveillance carbon monoxide communication radio configuration coolant copilot

The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft.

The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce course error or stay on course.

Provides the most efficient heading to get back to the desired course and proceed along the flight plan.

Course to Radial

Cockpit Reference Guide current

The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction, left or right.

course

Course to Steer cursor control

The total of all legs in a flight plan.

Cockpit Voice Recorder coverage control wheel steering cylinder density altitude database decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return) declutter decrease fuel degree de-icing

190-00592-01 Rev. A


C-1

APPENDIX C

DEP

Desired Track

DF

DFLT

DGRD

Dilution of Precision

DIS

Distance

DME

DOP

DP

DSBL

DTK departure

The desired course between the active

“from” and “to” waypoints.

Direct to Fix default degrade

A measure of GPS satellite geometry quality on a scale of one to ten (lower numbers equal better geometry, where higher numbers equal poorer geometry) distance

The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to a destination waypoint.

Distance Measuring Equipment

Dilution of Precision

Departure Procedure disabled

Desired Track

Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to reach the

ETA

ETE

EXPIRD

E

EASA

ECU

Efficiency

EGT

EIS

ELEV

ELEV empty

European Aviation Safety Agency

Engine Control Unit

A measure of fuel consumption, expressed in distance per unit of fuel.

Exhaust Gas Temperature

Engine Indication System elevation elevator

EMERGCY

EMI

ENDUR

Endurance

ENG

ENGD emergency

Electromagnetic Interference endurance

Flight endurance, or total possible flight time based on available fuel on board.

engine engaged

ENR enroute

Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct-to.

ENT

EPE

ERR

ESA enter

Estimated Position Error error

Enroute Safe Altitude

Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS position error derived by satellite geometry conditions and other factors.

Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft should reach the destination waypoint, based upon current speed and track.

Fuel On Board

GEO

GFC

GIA

GMA

GMT

G/S, GS

GA gal, gl

GBOX

GDC

GDL

GDU

GEA

FD

FD

FDE

FFLOW

FIS-B

FISDL

FLC

FM

FA

FAA

FADEC

FAF

FAIL

FC

FCC

FCST

FMS

FOB

FPL fpm

FREQ

FRZ

FSS ft

Fuel Flow destination waypoint from the present position, based upon current groundspeed.

Estimated Time of Arrival

Estimated Time Enroute expired

Course From Fix to Altitude

Federal Aviation Administration

Full Authority Digital Engine Control

Final Approach Fix failure

Course From Fix to Distance

Federal Communication Commission forecast

Course From Fix to DME Distance flight director

Fault Detection and Exclusion fuel flow

Flight Information Services-Broadcast

Flight Information Service Data Link

Flight Level Change

Course From Fix to Manual Termination

Flight Management System

Fuel On Board flight plan feet per minute frequency freezing

Flight Service Station foot/feet

The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of fuel per hour.

The total amount of usable fuel on board the aircraft.

glideslope go-around gallon(s) gearbox

Garmin Air Data Computer

Garmin Satellite Data Link

Garmin Display Unit

Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit geographic

Garmin Flight Control

Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit

Garmin Audio Panel System

Greenwich Mean Time

C-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

GMU

GND gph

GPS

Grid MORA

Groundspeed

IF

IFR

IG

ILS

I

IAF

IAT

IAU

ICAO

ICS

ID

IDENT, IDNT

Garmin Magnetometer Unit ground gallons per hour

Global Positioning System

Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; one degree latitude by one degree longitude in size and clears the highest elevation reference point in the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of the grid

The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position.

see Track

Garmin Reference System

Groundspeed

Garmin Transponder

Inner Marker

Initial Approach Fix

Indicated Air Temperature

Integrated Avionics Unit

International Civil Aviation Organization

Intercom System

Identification/Morse Code Identifier identification

Initial Fix

Instrument Flight Rules

Imperial gallon

Instrument Landing System

IMC in

INACTV

INC FUEL

IND

Indicated

INFO in HG

INT

INTEG

IrDA, IRDA

Ground Track

GRS

GS

GTX hr

HSDB

HSI

HT

HUL

Hz

HA

HDG

Heading

HF

HFOM

Hg

HI

Hold Terminating at Altitude heading

The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro.

Hold Terminating at Fix

Horizontal Figure of Merit mercury high

HI SENS

HM

High Sensitivity

Hold with Manual Termination hPa hectopascal

Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s horizontal position.

hour

High-Speed Data Bus

Horizontal Situation Indicator heat

Horizontal Uncertainty Level

Hertz

KEYSTK kg kHz km kt

Instrument Meteorological Conditions inch inactive increase fuel indicated

Information provided by properly calibrated and set instrumentation on the aircraft panel.

information inches of mercury intersection(s) integrity (RAIM unavailable)

Infrared Data Association

L

LAT

LBL lb left latitude label pound

LCD

LCL

Liquid Crystal Display local

LED Light Emitting Diode

Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of one or more legs of a flight plan or direct-to.

Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining, based on the amount of fuel on board after the completion of one or more legs of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known consumption rate.

Leg The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints.

LIFR

LO

LOC

LON

Low Instrument Flight Rules low localizer longitude

LRU

LTNG

LVL

Line Replacement Unit lightning level

M

MAG VAR

MAHP

MAN IN

MAN SQ key stuck kilogram kilohertz kilometer knot

Middle Marker

Magnetic Variation

Missed Approach Hold Point manifold pressure (inches Hg)

Manual Squelch

190-00592-01 Rev. A


C-3

APPENDIX C

NAV

NAVAID

NDB

NEXRAD nm

NRST

O

OAT

OBS

OXY

P ALT

PA

PA

PASS

PC

PFD

PI

PIT, PTCH

POH

POHS

POSN

MKR

MOA

MOV mpm

MSA

MSL m mV

MVFR

MAP

MASQ

MAX

MAXSPD

MDA

MET

METAR

MEPT

Missed Approach Point

Master Avionics Squelch maximum maximum speed (overspeed) barometric minimum descent height manual electric trim

Meteorological Aviation Routine manual electric pitch trim

MFD

MGRS

MHz

MIC

Multi Function Display

Military Grid Reference System megahertz microphone

MIN minimum

Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the aircraft present position.

marker beacon

Military Operations Area movement meters per minute

Minimum Safe Altitude

Mean Sea Level meter millivolt(s)

Marginal Visual Flight Rules navigation

NAVigation AID

Non-directional Beacon

Next Generation Radar nautical mile(s) nearest

Outer Marker

Outside Air Temperature

Omni Bearing Selector oxygen pressure altitude

Passenger Address

Proximity Advisory passenger(s) personal computer

Primary Flight Display

Procedure Turn to Course Intercept pitch

Pilot’s Operating Handbook

Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement position

SA

SAT

SCIT

SD sec

SEL, SLCT

SFC

SIAP

SID

SIGMET

Sim

SLP/SKD

SMBL

SPD

SPI

SPKR

SQ

SRVC, SVC

RF

RMI

RMT

RNG

RNWY

ROL

ROM rpm

R

RAD

RAIM

RAM

REF

REM

REQ

RES, RSV

RST FUEL

RVRSNRY

RX

PPM

P. POS

PRES, PRESS

PROC psi

PT

PTT

PWR

QTY

C-4 parts per million

Present Position pressure procedure(s) pounds per square inch

Procedure Turn

Push-to-Talk power quantity right radial

Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring random access memory reference remaining (fuel remaining above Reserve) required reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)

Constant Radius Turn to Fix

Radio Magnetic Indicator remote range runway roll read only memory revolutions per minute reset fuel reversionary receive

Selective Availability

Static Air Temperature

Storm Cell Identification and Tracking

Secure Digital second(s) select surface

Standard Instrument Approach Procedures

Standard Instrument Departure

Significant Meteorological Information simulator slip/skid symbol speed

Special Position Identification speaker squelch service


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

STAL

STAR

STATS

STBY

STD

STRMSCP

SUA

SUSP

SW

SYS

TCAS

TEL

TEMP

TERM

TF

TFR

T HDG

TIS

TA

TACAN

TAF

TAS

TAS

TAT

TAWS

TCA

TIT

TKE

TMA

TMR/REF

Topo

Track

Track Angle Error

TRG

TRK

TRUNC

TTL

TX

UNAVAIL

USR

UTC

UTM/UPS

V, Vspeed

V

LE

190-00592-01 Rev. A stall

Standard Terminal Arrival Route statistics standby standard

Stormscope

Special Use Airspace suspend software system

Traffic Advisory

Tactical Air Navigation System

Terminal Aerodrome Forecast

True Airspeed

Traffic Advisory System

Total Air Temperature

Terrain Awareness and Warning System

Terminal Control Area

Traffic Collision Avoidance System telephone temperature terminal

Track Between Two Fixes

Temporary Flight Restriction

True Heading

Traffic Information System

Turbine Inlet Temperature

Track Angle Error

Terminal Maneuvering Area

Timer/Reference topographic

Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’

The angle difference between the desired track and the current track.

target track truncated total transmit unavailable user

Coordinated Universal Time

Universal Transverse Mercator / Universal

Polar Stereographic Grid velocity (airspeed) maximum landing gear extended speed

W

WAAS

WARN

WGS-84

WPT

WW

WX

XFER, XFR

XPDR

XTALK

XTK

VHF

VI

VLOC

VM

VMC

VNAV

VOL

VOR

VORTAC

V

R

V

X

V

Y

V

YSE

VA

V

LO

V

MC

V

MO

V

NE

(M

MO

) maximum landing gear operating speed minimum control speed maximum speed never-exceed speed rotate speed best angle of climb speed best rate of climb speed best single-engine rate of climb speed

VAPP

VD

Vdc

VERT

Heading Vector to Altitude

VOR approach

Heading Vector to DME Distance volts, direct current vertical

Vertical Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the aircraft’s vertical position.

Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary to descend/ climb from a current position and altitude to a defined target position and altitude, based upon current groundspeed.

VFOM

VFR

Vertical Figure of Merit

Visual Flight Rules

Very High Frequency

Heading Vector to Intercept

VOR/Localizer Receiver

Heading Vector to Manual Termination

Visual Meteorological Conditions vertical navigation volume

VHF Omnidirectional Range very high frequency omnidirectional range station and tactical air navigation

VPROF

VR

VS

VSI

VSR

VNAV profile, vertical profile

Heading Vector to Radial vertical speed

Vertical Speed Indicator

Vertical Speed Required watt(s)

Wide Area Augmentation System warning (GPS position error)

World Geodetic System - 1984 waypoint(s) world wide weather transfer transponder cross-talk cross-track


C-5

APPENDIX C

B

LANK

P

AGE

C-6


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX D

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.

W

HAT IS

RAIM

AND HOW DOES IT AFFECT APPROACH OPERATIONS

?

RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that performs the following functions:

• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites

• Eliminates a corrupt satellite from the navigation solution

• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase of flight

• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is sufficient to satisfy requirements

NOTE:

If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the INTEG annunciation flagging on the HSI.

For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.

RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The

G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).

Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.

W

HY ARE THERE NOT ANY APPROACHES AVAILABLE FOR A FLIGHT PLAN

?

Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.

W

HAT HAPPENS WHEN AN APPROACH IS SELECTED

? C

AN A FLIGHT PLAN WITH AN APPROACH

,

A DEPARTURE

,

OR AN

ARRIVAL BE STORED

?

When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.

Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is

190-00592-01 Rev. A


D-1

APPENDIX D activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the

G1000 System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan.

C

AN

“

SLANT

G

OLF

” (“/G”)

BE FILED USING THE

G1000?

“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 System meets the requirements of TSO-C129 Class A1 or A2 installation. Non-precision GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the approved

Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.

W

HAT DOES THE

OBS S

OFTKEY DO

?

The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active waypoint.

Normal (OBS not activated)

• Automatic sequencing of waypoints

OBS

• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint

• Manual course change on HSI not possible

• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint

• Must be in this mode for final approach course

• Manually select course to waypoint from

HSI

• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint

• Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns

When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the

CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).

One application for the OBS Softkey is holding patterns. The OBS Softkey is used to suspend waypoint sequencing and select the desired course along the waypoint side of the hold. For many approach operations, setting and resetting of waypoint sequencing is automatic. Holding patterns that are part of an approach automatically disable waypoint sequencing, then re-enable waypoint sequencing after one time around the holding pattern. To fly the holding pattern a second time, press the OBS Softkey. An example of this operation is an approach which begins with a holding pattern at the initial approach fix (IAF).

WARNING:

The G1000 does not provide guidance to the missed approach hold point (MAHP). Always follow published missed approach procedures when flying a missed approach.

D-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX D

The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a “SUSP” annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal functionality.

W

HY DOES THE

G1000

NOT AUTOMATICALLY SEQUENCE TO THE NEXT WAYPOINT

?

The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or

“SUSP” annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs at an equal angle from each leg.

H

OW CAN A WAYPOINT BE SKIPPED IN AN APPROACH

,

A DEPARTURE

,

OR AN ARRIVAL

?

The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.

W

HEN DOES TURN ANTICIPATION BEGIN

?

The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to

25°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:

• A waypoint alert (“NEXT DTK ###°”) flashes on the PFD 10 seconds before the turn point

• A flashing turn advisory (“TURN TO ###°”) appears on the PFD when the pilot is to begin the turn and the

HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next DTK value

• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been crossed

W

HEN DOES THE

CDI

SCALE CHANGE

?

When 30 nm from the destination, the G1000 begins a smooth CDI scale transition from 5.0 nm (enroute mode) to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). When 2 nm from the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions to 0.3 nm (approach mode). When executing a missed approach, the CDI can be returned to the

1.0 nm scale by selecting the SUSP Softkey. The CDI is also set to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) within 30 nm of the departure airport.

W

HY DOES THE

HSI

NOT RESPOND LIKE A

VOR

WHEN

OBS

MODE IS ACTIVE

?

Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the destination.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


D-3

APPENDIX D

W

HAT IS THE CORRECT MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE

? H

OW IS THE MISSED APPROACH HOLDING POINT SELECTED

?

To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected

after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the approach plate.

To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan

Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.

A

FTER A MISSED APPROACH

,

HOW CAN THE SAME APPROACH BE RE

-

SELECTED

? H

OW CAN A NEW APPROACH BE

ACTIVATED

?

NOTE:

Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point

(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, the alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current approach?” appears. If the current approach is reactivated, the G1000 provides direction back to the transition waypoint and does not take into consideration any missed approach procedures.

After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt from the Procedures Window (opened by pressing the PROC Key). Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach from the Procedures Window by highlighting “Activate Approach?” using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.

To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure from the Procedures Window.

Choose “Select Approach?”, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.

To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using the FMS Knob. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.

D-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX E

G1000 MAP DATUMS

WARNING:

WGS 84 is the default datum and should be used in all situations except when another datum is specifically required for safe navigation. Pilots using map datums other than WGS 84 do so at their own risk.

The G1000 System supports the following map datums:

ADINDAN

AFGOOYE

Ethiopia, Mali, Senegal, Sudan

Somalia

AIN El ABD 1970 Bahrain Island, Saudi Arabia

ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 Cocos Islands

ARC 1950 Botswana, Lesotho, Malawi, Swaziland, Zaire,

Zambia, Zimbabwe

ARC 1960

ASCENSION IS 1958

Kenya, Tanzania

Ascension Island

ASTRO B4 SOROL ATOLL Tern Island

ASTRO BEACON “E” Iwo Jima Island

ASTRO DOS 71/4 St. Helena Island

ASTRONOMIC STN 1952 Marcus Island

AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1966 Australia, Tasmania Island

AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1984 Australia, Tasmania Island

AUSTRIA NS

BELGIUM 1950

BELLEVUE (IGN)

BERMUDA 1957

Austria

Belgium

Efate and Erromango Islands

Bermuda Islands

BOGATA OBSERVATORY Colombia

BUKIT RIMPAH Indonesia

CAMP AREA ASTRO

CAMPO INCHAUSPE

Antarctica

Argentina

CANTON ASTRO 1966 Phoenix Islands

CAPE South Africa

CAPE CANAVERAL

CARTHAGE

Florida, Bahama Islands

Tunisia

CH-1903

CHATHAM 1971

CHUA ASTRO

CORREGO ALEGRE

Switzerland

Chatham Island (New Zealand)

Paraguay

Brazil

DANISH GI 1934 Denmark

DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) Sumatra Island (Indonesia)

DOS 1968 Gizo Island (New Georgia Islands)

EASTER ISLAND 1967 Easter Island

EUROPEAN 1950 Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France,

Germany, Gibraltar, Greece, Italy,

Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,

Spain, Sweden, Switzerland

EUROPEAN 1979 Austria, Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Spain,

Sweden, Switzerland

FINLAND HAYFORD 1910 Finland

G. SEGARA Borneo

GANDAJIKA BASE Republic of Maldives

GEODETIC DATUM 1949 New Zealand

GGRS 87

GUAM 1963

Greece

Guam Island

GUX 1 ASTRO

HERAT NORTH

HJORSEY 1955

HONG KONG 1963

Guadalcanal Island

Afghanistan

Iceland

Hong Kong

HU-TZU SHAN Taiwan

INDIAN BNGLDSH NEPAL Bangladesh, India, Nepal

INDIAN MEAN VALUE India

INDIAN THAILAND VIETN Thailand, Vietnam

INDONESIA 74

IRELAND 1965

Indonesia

Ireland

ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 Diego Garcia

JOHNSTON ISLAND 1961 Johnston Island

KANDAWALA

KERGUELEN ISLAND

KERTAU 1948

L.C. 5 ASTRO

Sri Lanka

Kerguelen Island

West Malaysia

Cayman Brac Island

LIBERIA 1964 Liberia

LUZON MEAN VALUE Philippines

LUZON MINDANAO IS Mindanao Island

LUZON PHILIPPINES Philippines (excluding Mindanao Island)

MAHE 1971

MARCO ASTRO

MASSAWA

MERCHICH

Mahe Island

Salvage Islands

Eritrea (Ethiopia)

Morocco

MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 Midway Island

MINNA Nigeria

NAD27 ALASKA

NAD27 BAHAMAS

North American 1927 – Alaska

North American 1927 – Bahamas

NAD27 CANADA North American 1927 – Canada

NAD27 CANAL ZONE North American 1927 – Canal Zone

190-00592-01 Rev. A


E-1

APPENDIX E

NAD27 CARIBBEAN

NAD27 CENTRAL AMERICA North American 1927 – Central America:

Belize, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala,

Honduras, and Nicaragua

NAD27 CONUS

NAD27 CUBA

NAD27 GREENLAND

North American 1927 – Caribbean:

Barbados, Caicos Islands, Cuba, Dominican

Republic, Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Leeward and Turks Islands

North American 1927 – Continental United

States

North American 1927 – Cuba

North American 1927 – Greenland (Hayes

Peninsula)

NAD27 MEXICO North American 1927 – Mexico

NAD27 SAN SALVADOR IS North American 1927 – San Salvador Island

NAD83 North American 1983 – Alaska, Canada,

Central America, CONUS, Mexico

NAHRWAN MASIRAH IS Masirah Island (Oman)

NAHRWAN SAUDI ARABIA Saudi Arabia

NAHRWAN UNITD ARAB E United Arab Emirates

NAPARIMA BWI Trinidad and Tobago

NETHERLAND TRIAG ’21 Netherlands

NOU TRIAG FRANCE France

NOU TRIAG LUXEMBOURG Luxembourg

OBSERVATORIO 1966 Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)

OLD EGYPTIAN Egypt

OLD HAWAIIAN KAUAI Kauai

OLD HAWAIIAN MAUI Maui

OLD HAWAIIAN MEAN Mean Value

OLD HAWAIIAN OAHU Oahu

OMAN Oman

ORD SRV GRT BRITAIN England, Isle of Man, Scotland, Shetland

Islands, Wales

PICO DE LAS NIEVAS Canary Islands

PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 Pitcairn Island

PORTUGUESE 1973 Portugal

POTSDAM Germany

PROV SO AMERICA ’56 Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,

Peru, Venezuela

PROV SO CHILEAN 1963 South Chile

PUERTO RICO Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands

QATAR NATIONAL

QORNOQ

Qatar

South Greenland

REUNION

ROME 1940

RT 90

SANTO (DOS)

Mascarene Island

Sardinia Island

Sweden

Espirito Santo Island

SAO BRAZ

SAPPER HILL 1943

Sao Miguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)

East Falkland Island

SCHWARZECK Namibia

SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia,

Ecuador, Guyana, Paraguay, Peru, Venezuela

SOUTH ASIAN

SOUTHEAST BASE

SOUTHWEST BASE

Singapore

Porto Santo and Madeira Islands

Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge and Terceira

Islands

TANANARIVE OBSV 1925 Madagascar

TIMBALAI 1948 Brunei and East Malaysia (Sarawak and

Sabah)

TOKYO Japan, Korea, Okinawa

TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 Tristan da Cunha

VITI LEVU 1916 Viti Levu Island, Fiji Islands

WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 Marshal Islands

WGS 72

WGS 84

YACARE

ZANDERIJ

World Geodetic System 1972

World Geodetic System 1984

Uruguay

Surinam

E-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX F

GENERAL TIS INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

NOTE:

Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.

The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track reports to generate traffic notification. The G1000 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map

Page of the MFD. TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as well as on the PFD Inset Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The G1000 System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.

TIS VS. TAS/TCAS

The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS) and Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) or

Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half-second update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to provide a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.

TIS LIMITATIONS

NOTE:

TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance maneuvers during instrument meterorlogical conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.

NOTE:

Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more comprehensive explanation.

TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful aid for visual traffic avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.

• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.

• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the groundbased radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.

• Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.

190-00592-01 Rev. A


F-1

APPENDIX F

WARNING:

Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.

NOTE:

TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in mountainous regions.

TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the

Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old. TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay.

These algorithms use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on the Traffic Map Page. Errors affect relative bearing information and target track vector. This can cause a delay in the displayed intruder information. However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in spotting traffic.

The following errors are common examples:

• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.

• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle

(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display the intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.

These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder aircraft course stabilizes.

Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of the aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC, malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:

• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility

• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General

Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)

F-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX G

MAP SYMBOLS

AIRPORT

Item

Unknown Airport

Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport

Towered, Non-serviced Airport

Non-towered, Serviced Airport

Towered, Serviced Airport

Restricted (Private) Airport

Heliport

NAVAIDS

Item

Intersection

LOM (Compass Locator at Outer Marker)

NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)

VOR

VOR/DME

VOR/ILS

VORTAC

TACAN

Symbol

Symbol

BASEMAP

Item

Interstate Highway

State Highway

US Highway

National Highway

Small City or Town

Medium City

Large City

TRAFFIC

Item

Non-Threat Traffic

Proximity Advisory

Traffic Advisory, Out of Range

Traffic Advisory

Symbol

Symbol

190-00592-01 Rev. A


G-1

APPENDIX G

LINE SYMBOLS

Item

ICAO Control Area

Class B Airspace

Mode C Tower Area

Warning Area

Alert Area

Caution Area

Danger Area

Prohibited Area

Restricted Area

Training Area

Unknown Area

Class C

Terminal Radar Service Area

Mode C Area

Military Operations Area (MOA)

State or Province Border

International Border

Road

Railroad

Latitude/Longitude

Symbol

G-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX G

MISCELLANEOUS

Item

ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency

Map Pointer

Elevation Pointer

Measuring Pointer

Overzoom Indicator

Symbol Item

Terrain Proximity Enabled

Traffic Enabled

User Waypoint

Wind Vector

Symbol

OBSTACLE DATABASE COLORS AND SYMBOLS

Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle

< 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL

Obstacle

Color

Red

(WARNING)

Yellow

(CAUTION)

Gray

Obstacle Location

Obstacle within 100 ft or above aircraft altitude

Obstacle within 1000 ft of aircraft altitude

Obstacle more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude

Table G-1 Obstacle Symbols and Colors

TERRAIN PROXIMITY COLOR CHART

��

��

��

Terrain Color Terrain Location

Red (WARNING) Terrain at or within 100 ft below aircraft altitude

Yellow (CAUTION) Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft of aircraft altitude

Black Terrain more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude

Figure G-1 Terrain Proximity Colors

190-00592-01 Rev. A


G-3

APPENDIX G

B

LANK

P

AGE

G-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A

INDEX

A

Active Channel

Active frequency

ADF

ADF

Audio

Frequency toggling

Modes

Tuning

Volume

Advisories, message

Airport

Frequency

Information

Nearest

Runway

Airspace

Alert

Boundary

Frequency, load

Nearest

Airspeed Indicator

Airspeed Reference

Airspeed Trend Vector

Air Data Computer (ADC)

Alerting system

Alerts

Aircraft

Airspace

Arrival

Audio voice

Alerts Window

Alert levels

Altimeter

Barometric setting

Altitude alerting

Altitude buffer

Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)

Altitude Trend Vector

Ammeter

Annunciations

AFCS Status

G1000 System

Softkey

Test tone

Annunciation Window

5-62–5-63

5-16

5-65–5-66

5-62

2-2, 2-4–2-5

7-11, 7-25,

7-29

2-4

1-3

A-1

A-1

A-3

1-31

1-31

1-32, A-4

2-20

A-2

2-2, 2-7–2-8

2-2, 2-8

2-22

1-31

7-9, 7-22,

7-25, 7-27

2-7

3-7

8-4

4-6, 4-15

4-22

4-16

4-23

4-22, 4-24

4-23, 4-25

4-24

A-6–A-12

5-50, 5-51

5-49, 5-50,

5-53

1-34, 5-49–5-

52, 5-52–5-53

5-36, 5-50,

5-51

Annunciator lights

Approach

Activate

Activate missed

Activate Vector-to-Final

Cancel

Load

4-32

D-1

5-97, 5-102,

5-103

5-99

5-99, 5-103

5-28

5-97–5-98,

Missed

Remove

5-102

D-2–D-4

5-99

Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC)

7-12, 7-18,

AP DISC switch

Arrival

Information

Load

7-26

7-3

5-95

5-93–5-94

Remove

5-95, 5-99

ARTCC frequency, load

5-60

Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)

Attitude Indicator

Audio alerting system

Audio Panel

Controls

1-3, 1-8,

1-11–1-12

2-2, 2-6–2-7

A-1

1-2, 1-10

4-4–4-5

Auto-tuning

COM

4-10

NAV

4-18, 4-20

Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)

1-1, 7-1–7-30

Alerts and annunciations

7-29–7-30

Example procedures

Status Annunciations

7-21–7-28

7-28

Status Box

Automatic squelch

Autopilot

Autopilot disconnect

2-2, 7-5

4-14

7-1, 7-19–7-

20

7-13, 7-20,

7-27

Auxiliary Pages (AUX)

Aviation database

Aviation map data

1-25

B-1

5-15–5-16

A-13

1-10, A-4–A-5

2-21

1-35

2-3, 2-20

B

Backcourse Mode (BC)

Backlighting

7-17

1-42

Barometric minimum descent altitude

2-

3, 2-17, 2-23

Barometric setting, Altimeter

2-2, 2-8

Bearing/distance, measuring

5-23

Bearing Information Windows 2-3

Bearing pointers

Bearing source

Bus voltage

2-15

2-16

3-7

C

Channel list, XM

Checklists

COM channel spacing

COM frequency

8-3

1-40–1-41

Command Bars, flight director 7-4

Communication (COM) Frequency Box

2-2

4-13

Load

Select

COM radio, selecting

Controls

Audio Panel

5-36, 5-60–5-

61, 5-65–5-66

5-53

4-6

CNS

PFD/MFD

4-4–4-5

4-2–4-3

1-15–1-16,

1-23

Softkeys

1-17–1-20

Control Wheel Steering (CWS) 7-20

Course, adjusting

2-11, 2-13

Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 1-33–1-34,

2-10, 2-14–2-

Changing scale

15, 4-15, 5-28

D-3

Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) 3-3, 3-4

D

Databases

Data bar fields, MFD

Data entry

Data Link Receiver

Troubleshooting

Date and time

Declutter

Automatic

Levels

Departure

1-7, 1-8, 1-35,

B-1

1-32

1-22–1-23

1-4

A-14

1-29

1-18, 5-25

5-19

5-19

Select

Timer

5-90, 5-100

1-37

Digital Audio entertainment

8-1

Dilution of Precision (DOP)

1-13

Direct-to

Activate

Cancel

Edit

5-26–5-32

5-53

5-29, 5-32

5-28

190-00592-01 Rev. A


I-1

INDEX

Enter destination

Display backup

Display controls

DME

Audio

Information Window

Modes

Tuning

5-26–5-28, 5-

30, 5-31–5-32

1-10

1-15–1-22

4-16

2-16

4-22, 4-25

4-25

E

Efficiency, fuel

Electronic checklists

Emergency frequency

Endurance

5-81

1-40–1-41

4-9

5-81

Engine Airframe Unit

1-3

Engine Indication System (EIS) 3-1–3-8

Engine leaning assist

3-5

Engine Manifold Pressure (MAN IN HG)

Entertainment inputs

3-3, 3-5, 3-7

4-35

Estimated Position Error (EPE) 1-13

Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) 3-4

F

Flight director

Pitch modes

Roll modes

Flight ID

7-1, 7-4–7-5

7-7–7-13

7-14–7-29

4-26, 4-31

Flight Level Change Mode (FLC) 7-11, 7-25,

7-29

Flight plan

Active

5-15

Closest point to reference

5-89

Invert

Storing

Flight Plan Pages (FPL)

Flight timer

5-88

D-1

1-26

1-37

Frequency

COM

Nearest

VOR

Frequency spacing

5-53

5-67

5-58

4-13

Frequency transfer arrow

4-7

Frequently asked questions

D-1

FSS frequency, load

Fuel

5-61

Efficiency

Planning

Range ring

Fuel calculations

5-81

5-82–5-83

5-14

3-6


Totalizer

3-3, 3-5, 3-7

3-6

Fuel Quantity (FUEL QTY GAL) 3-3

Fuel remaining, calculated (GAL REM)

3-6

Fuel remaining (GAL REM)

Fuel used (GAL USED)

3-7

3-7

G

GA switch

GFC 700 AFCS

Glideslope Indicator

Glideslope Mode (GS)

7-3

7-1–7-30

2-3, 2-9

7-12, 7-18,

7-26

Global Positioning System (GPS)

Navigation

Receiver information

Go Around Mode (GA)

Groundspeed

5-26–5-104,

5-31–5-104

1-12–1-14

7-13, 7-27

1-38

H

Heading

2-2, 2-11

Heading Select Mode (HDG)

7-16, 7-22,

HI SENS

Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

7-26, 7-27

4-21

2-

2, 2-10–2-16

360

Arc

2-10

2-10–2-11

I

IDENT function

ID indicator

Inset Map, PFD

4-31

4-17

2-3, 5-24–5-

25

Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) 1-2

INTEG annunciation, HSI

2-12

Intercom system (ICS)

Intersection

4-35

Information

Nearest

5-38–5-39

5-54

J

Jeppesen aviation database

B-1

L

Land map data

5-6, 5-17

Line Replaceable Units (LRU)

1-2–1-5

M

Manual Electric Trim (MET)

Map

Datums

Panning

Scale

Symbols

Map Pages (MAP)

Marker beacon

Annunciations

Receiver

MASQ processing

7-1, 7-3, 7-19

1-30, E-1–E-2

5-19

5-19

G-1–G-3

1-24

2-3, 2-21

4-21

4-1

Measurement units, changing displayed

1-30

Menus

Messages

1-22

Reminder

1-38

Message advisories, G1000

A-6–A-12

Metric display, Altimeter

MFD Data Bar fields

Minimum descent altitude

Missed approach

2-7–2-8

1-32

2-3

5-28, D-2–D-4

Activate

Morse code identifier

5-99

4-17

Multi Function Display (MFD) 1-2

Controls

1-15–1-16

Softkeys

Music inputs

1-20

4-35–4-36

N

Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box 2-2

Navigation Data Bar

5-22

Navigation Map

5-19–5-104,

5-30, 6-10

Setup

5-3–5-17

Navigation Mode (VOR, GPS, LOC, BC)

7-17, 7-18,

7-23, 7-24,

Navigation source

Navigation Status Box

NAV radio, selection

NDB

Nearest

Nearest

Airports

7-27

2-12–2-13,

4-15

1-32, 2-2

4-15–4-16

5-55

Intersection

NDB

VOR

1-34, 5-49–5-

52

5-54

5-55

5-56–5-57

I-2


190-00592-01 Rev. A

INDEX

Nearest airports, frequency tuning

4-10

Nearest Airports Page

Nearest Pages (NRST)

Normal display operation

5-44

1-25

1-9

O

Obstacle map data

Odometer

Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)

Oil Temperature (OIL °F)

5-13

1-38

3-3

3-3

Omni-bearing Selector (OBS)

2-13, D-2–D-3

Orientation, map

5-5

Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 2-2, 2-18

Overspeed protection, autopilot 7-29

P

Page groups

Page menus

1-23–1-26

1-22

Pan map

5-20, 5-25

Passenger Address (PA) system 4-34

Pilot control lighting (PLC) frequency, load

5-36

Pilot profiles

Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)

1-28–1-29

7-8, 7-29

Pitch indication

2-6

Pitch modes, flight director

7-7–7-13

Pitch Reference

Power-up, system

Power-up splash screen

Power on settings

7-8

1-8

1-8

4-32

Presets, XM radio channels

8-6

Primary Flight Display (PFD)

1-2

Controls

Softkeys

Procedures

1-15–1-16

1-17–1-19

5-100–5-103,

5-101–5-104,

AFCS examples

5-102–5-104

7-21–7-28

Procedure Loading Pages (PROC) 1-26

Proximity Advisory (PA)

6-35

R

Range

Auto zoom

5-9, 5-81

5-6

Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring

(RAIM)

1-13–1-14,

D-1

Reminder messages

1-38

Reversionary display operation 1-9

Roll Hold Mode (ROL)

Roll indication

Roll modes, flight director

Roll Reference

Runway

Information

Minimum length

Surface

RX indicator

S

Scheduler

Secure Digital (SD) card

Selected Altitude

1-38–1-39

1-7, 1-40, B-1

2-2, 2-8, 2-22,

7-7, 7-9, 7-10,

7-22

2-2

Selected Altitude Bug

Selected Course

Selected Heading

Sequencing waypoints, automatic

Service class, XM weather

2-3, 2-11

2-3, 2-11,

7-16, 7-22,

7-26, 7-27

D-3

8-2

Servos

Slip/Skid Indicator

Softkey annunciations

Speaker, cabin

Splash screen, power-up

Standby frequency

1-4, 7-19

2-2, 2-7

2-21

4-32

1-8

4-6, 4-10,

4-15

4-22

ADF

Stereo headsets

Stuck microphone

SUSP annunciation, HSI

Symbols, map

System annunciations

System Display (EIS)

4-32

4-7

2-13

G-1–G-3

1-10, A-1

3-6

System power-up

System Setup Page

System Status Page

System time

Format

Offset

1-8

1-27–1-33

1-35

2-2, 2-19

1-29

1-29

T

7-15

2-7

7-14–7-17

7-15

5-50, 5-51

1-34

1-34

4-7

Tachometer (RPM)

Terrain

Color indications

Database

3-3, 3-5, 3-7

G-3

B-2

Map data

5-12–5-13

Terrain and Obstacle Proximity 6-27

Time, system

Timer

Departure

Flight

Generic

Timer/References Window

Topographic map data

1-29

1-37

1-37

1-36, 2-18

2-17

Total flight hours

Track vector

Traffic Advisory (TA)

5-10–5-11,

5-21

3-7

5-7

6-35

Traffic Annunciation

2-3, 2-22

Traffic Information Service (TIS) 6-33, F-1–F-2

Symbology

Voice alerts

6-34

2-22

Transponder

Code entry

Data box

Modes

Mode field

1-3, 4-1, 4-26

4-26, 4-29

4-1, 2-2

4-27, 4-28

4-1, 4-27,

Mode S

Mode selection softkeys

Trend Vector

Airspeed

Altitude

Turn Rate

Trip statistics

True airspeed

Turn anticipation

Turn Rate Indicator

Turn Rate Trend Vector

TX indicator

U

Utilities

4-26, 4-27

4-26, 4-27,

4-29

2-4

2-7

2-11

1-38

2-2, 2-4

D-3

2-2, 2-11

2-11

4-7

5-83–5-85

V

Vector-to-Final, activate

5-103

Vertical Deviation Indicator

2-3, 2-9

Vertical Navigation (VNAV)

5-84–5-85

Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

2-2, 2-9

Vertical Speed Mode (VS)

7-10, 7-22

Vertical Speed Reference

VFR code

7-10, 7-22

4-29

Voice alerts, TIS traffic

Voltmeter

Volume

ADF

2-22, A-4

3-7

4-22, 4-24

190-00592-01 Rev. A


I-3

INDEX

XM Radio

VOR

Frequency

Information

Nearest

Recent

Selection

Vspeed references

8-6

5-58

5-42–5-43

5-56–5-57

5-43

4-15

2-5, 2-17

W

WARN annunciation, HSI

Warranty

Waypoint

Automatic sequencing

Skipping

Waypoint, user

Comment

Recent

Waypoint Pages (WPT)

Weather Data Link Page

Weather Products

Wind vector

Wings level

WX frequency, load

i

2-12

D-2, D-3

D-3

X

XM

Audio and Radio ID

6-1

Receiver troubleshooting

A-14

Information Page

Radio Page

Satellite Radio

8-2

8-3

1-4, 8-1

5-46

5-45

1-24

6-6, 6-7, 6-11

6-5, 8-2

5-8

7-6, 7-13, 7-

15, 7-18, 7-24

5-61

Z

Zoom

Range

Auto

5-25

5-6

I-4


190-00592-01 Rev. A